Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPermit D08-243 - SEGMENT 2 - MCDONALD'S - RESTAURANT BUILDINGDO8-243 McDonald's 15210 Tukwila International Boulevard Due to the file size, this record has been broken down into 4 segments for easier download. Click on the following links to review the permit segments: Segment 1 - McDonald's D08-243 Segment 2 - McDonald's D08-243 Segment 3 - McDonald's D08-243 Segment 4 - Plans - McDonald's D08-243 • • B. Patching Mortar. Mix dry -pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush -coat holes and voids with bonding agent Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form -tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concretes durability and structural performance as determined by Architect. D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template. 1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4 -inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Inspections: 1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Steel reinforcement welding. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature. 6. Verification of concrete strength before removal of shores and forms from beams and slabs. CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13 • C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements: 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each days pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd., but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof. 2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day. a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive -strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 3. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change. 4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal -weight concrete; ASTM C 173, volumetric method, for structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. 5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each composite sample. 6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each days pour of each concrete mixture. 7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31. a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. b. Cast and field cure two sets of three standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample. 8. Compressive -Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; test one set of two laboratory -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. Test one set of two field -cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. b. A compressive -strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated. 9. When strength of field -cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory -cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive -strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive - strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive -strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28 -day tests. 12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42 or by other methods as directed by Architect. 14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate that they do not comply with the Contract Documents. The corrections and any other work affected by or resulting from corrections to the concrete work shall be at the Contractor's expense. END OF SECTION 033000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMUs). 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Face bride. 4. Mortar and grout. 5. Reinforcing steel. 6. Masonry joint reinforcement. 7. Ties and anchors. 8. Embedded flashing. 9. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 10. Masonry -cell insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division Section 071113 "Bituminous Dampproofing" for dampproofing applied to cavity face of backup wythes of cavity walls. 2. Division Section 071900 "Water Repellents" for water repellents applied to unit masonry assemblies. 3. Division Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for exposed sheet metal flashing. 4. Division Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping at openings in masonry walls. 5. Division Section 078446 "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for fire -resistive joint systems at heads of masonry walls. 6. Division Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. C. Products fumished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under Division Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." D. Products installed, but not fumished, under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels, fumished under Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications," where indicated on Drawings. 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, fumished under Division Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail comer units, end -dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples: For each type and color of the following: 1. Decorative concrete masonry units. 2. Face brick, in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 3. Special brick shapes. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 1 • 4. Weep holes/vents. 5. Accessories embedded in masonry. D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. F. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For bricks, include size -variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Reinforcing bars. 5. Joint reinforcement. 6. Anchors, ties, and metal accessories. G. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports, per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. H. Cold -Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold -weather requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. D. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. 1. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 67. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, per ASTM C 140. 3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, per ASTM C 780. 4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, per ASTM C 1019. E. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire -resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 2 • F. Sample Panels: Build sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build sample panels for typical exterior wall / typical interior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches long by 48 inches high. 2. Clean one-half of exposed faces of panels with masonry cleaner indicated. 3. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather -resistant membrane. 4. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof Toads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain -splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Tum scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 3 • • 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, comers, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide square -edged units for outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units. 1. Integral Water Repellent: Liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water-repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E 514, with test period extended to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of test specimen. a. Products: 1) Grace Construction Products, unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry -Block. 2) Architect approved equal. C. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Medium weight, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. D. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Medium weight. 3. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Pattern and Texture: a. Standard pattern, ground finish. Match Architect's samples. b. Standard pattem, split -face finish. Match Architect's samples. 5. Basis of Design Products: a. Standard pattern, ground finish; Northfield Block Company; A-7. b. Standard pattem, split -face finish; Northfield Block Company; 4916. 2.4 MASONRY LINTELS A. General: Provide masonry lintels, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. B. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built -in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built -in-place lintels until cured. 2.5 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions, including those at comers, movement joints, bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 4 • 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBX. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net -area compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 4. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2-1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long. 5. Products: a. B1: Rubi-60; Belden Brick. b. B2: Modular Midland Blend A; Belden Brick. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold -weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Portland Cement -Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, and hydrated lime complying with ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91. E. Mortar Cement: ASTM C 1329. F. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry rnortar. G. Aggregate for Mortar. ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. H. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. Cold -Weather Admixture: Non -chloride, non -corrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated. 1. Products: a. Addiment Incorporated; Mortar Kick. b. Euclid Chemical Company; Accelguard 80. c. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. d. Sonnebom, Div. of ChemRex; Trimix-NCA. J. Water -Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with concrete masonry units, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: a. Grace Construction Products, unit of W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry -Block Mortar Admixture. b. Architect approved equal. K. Water. Potable. 2.7 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615 or ASTM A 996, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951. 1. Exterior Walls: Hot -dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Wire Size for Side Rods: W2.8 or 0.188 -inch diameter. 3. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W2.8 or 0.188 -inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W2.8 or 0.188 -inch diameter. 5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 5 • C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single -Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Veneers Anchored with Seismic Masonry -Veneer Anchors: Single 0.188- inch- diameter, hot -dip galvanized, carbon -steel continuous wire. 2.8 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with eight subparagraphs below, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Hot -Dip Galvanized, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153, Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8 -inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide. 1. Z-shaped ties with ends bent 90 degrees to provide hooks not less than 2 inches long may be used for masonry constructed from solid units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal. 2. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16 -inch -diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4 -inch diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. 2. Tie Section for Steel Frame: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry face, made from 0.25 -inch diameter, hot -dip galvanized steel wire. E. Partition Top anchors: 0.097 -inch thick metal plate with 3/8 -inch diameter metal rod 6 inches long welded to plate and with dosed -end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. F. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches wide by 1/4 inch thick by 24 inches long, with ends tumed up 2 inches or with cross pins, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Corrosion Protection: Hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153. G. Adjustable Masonry -Veneer Anchors 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-Ibf load in both tension and compression without deforming or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Seismic Masonry -Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a metal anchor section and a connector section designed to engage a continuous wire embedded in the veneer mortar joint. 3. Polymer -Coated, Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than 3 exposed threads, and with organic polymer coating with salt -spray resistance to red rust of more than 800 hours per ASTM B 117. 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS A. Unit Type inserts in Concrete: Cast-iron or malleable -iron wedge -type inserts. B. Anchor Bolts: Headed or L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153, Class C; of dimensions indicated. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where indicated, complying with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows: 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 240, Type 304, 0.016 inch thick. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 6 • • 2. Fabricate continuous flashings in sections 96 inches long minimum, but not exceeding 12 feet. Provide splice plates at joints of formed, smooth metal flashing. 3. Fabricate through -wall metal flashing embedded in masonry from stainless steel, with ribs at 3 -inch intervals along length of flashing to provide an integral mortar bond. 4. Fabricate through -wall flashing with snaplock receiver on exterior face where indicated to receive counterflashing. 5. Fabricate through -wall flashing with drip edge, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by extending flashing 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed. 6. Fabricate through -wall flashing with sealant stop, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate by bending metal back on itself 3/4 inch at exterior face of wall and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 7. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 3/8 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. B. Flexible Hashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use one of the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637, 0.040 inch thick. a. Products: 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Pre-Kleened EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. 2) Firestone Building Products; FlashGuard. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 81 EPDM Thru-Wall Flashing. C. Single -Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from high-density polyethylene incorporating chemical stabilizers that prevent UV degradation. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts that are designed to be built into mortar bed joints and weep collected moisture to the exterior of CMU walls and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Blok-Flash" by Advanced Building Products Inc. D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, chemically curing urethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler. Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. 1. Dur -O -Wall; Rapid Soft-Joint/Expansion Joint. 2. Hohmann & Bamard, Inc.; NS Series - Closed Cell Neoprene Sponge. 3. Williams Products; SAS -1040 and EJS-1040. B. Preformed Control -Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene -butadiene -rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Dur -O -Wall; Rapid Control Joint Rubber Compound. 2. Heckmann Building Products; Rubber Control Joint. 3. Hohmann & Bamard, Inc.; RS Series Rubber Control Joint. C. Bond -Breaker Strips: Asphalt -saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. WeepNent Products: Vinyl weep hole/vent, one-piece, offset, T-shaped units made from flexible, injection - molded PVC, designed to fit into a head joint and consisting of a louvered vertical leg, flexible wings to seal against ends of masonry units, and a top flap to keep mortar out of the head joint; in color approved by Architect to match that of mortar. 1. Hohmann & Bamard, Inc.; #343 Louvered Weep Hole. 2. Williams Products, Inc.; Williams-Goodco Brick Vent. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 7 • • 3. Wire -Bond; Louvered Weepholes. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free -draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. Strips, full -depth of cavity and 10 inches wide, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being dogged with mortar droppings. 1. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. F. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.142 -inch steel wire, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 1. Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur -O -Wal Division; D/A 810, D/A 812 or D/A 817. 2. Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 376 Rebar Positioner. 3. Hohmann & Bamard, Inc.; #RB or #RB -Twin Rebar Positioner. 4. Wire -Bond; 0 -Ring or Double 0 -Ring Rebar Positioner. 2.12 MASONRY -CELL INSULATION A. Loose -Granular Fill Insulation: Perlite complying with ASTM C 549, Type II (surface treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption) or Type IV (surface treated for water repellency and to limit dust generation). 2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Masonry Cleaner. For all materials and methods for cleaning masonry, follow manufacturers recommendations. Do not use muriatic acid. B. Job -Mixed Detergent Solution: Solution of trisodium phosphate (1/2 -cup dry measure) and laundry detergent (1/2 -cup dry measure) dissolved in one gallon of water. C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner. Manufacturer's standard -strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. 1. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface -acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. 2. For dark -colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface -acting acids and special inhibitors. 3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains, use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be used to clean unit masonry surfaces include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) ProSoCo, Inc. 2) Diedrich Technologies, Inc. 3) EaCo Chem, Inc. 2.14 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air -entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water- repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 3. Add cold -weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 8 • 3. For exterior, above -grade, load-bearing and non -load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior Toad -bearing walls; for interior non -load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1 /ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143. E. Epoxy Pointing Mortar. Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough -in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor -driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external comers, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed -joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 9 • • 3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement -type joints, retums, and offsets. Avoid using less -than -half-size units, particularly at comers, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings; do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded. Do not use units with less than nominal 4 -inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar, unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, and similar items, unless otherwise indicated. Build non -load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2 -inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non -load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead -load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire -rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division Section 078446 "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems." 3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. 3.5 MASONRY -CELL INSULATION A. Pour granular insulation into cavities to fill void spaces. Maintain inspection ports to show presence of insulation at extremities of each pour area. Close the ports after filling has been confirmed. 3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 10 • 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at comers by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns, offsets, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.7 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS A. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces structural members to comply with the following: 1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch in width between masonry and structural member, unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36 inches o.c. horizontally. 3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing with masonry -veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw -attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Insert slip -in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. 3. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 18 inches o.c. vertically and 24 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 6. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 32 inches o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches, around perimeter. 3.9 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in -plane wall or partition movement. Placement to be in accordance with the International Masonry Institute recommendations. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: 1. Fit bond -breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control -joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond -breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam -plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Build flanges of metal expansion strips into masonry. Lap each joint 4 inches in direction of water flow. Seal joints below grade and at junctures with horizontal expansion joints if any. 2. Build flanges of factory -fabricated, expansion -joint units into masonry. 3. Build in compressible joint fillers where indicated. 4. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division Section 079200 "Joint Sealants." UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 11 • D. Provide horizontal, pressure -relieving joints by either leaving an air space or inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants," but not Tess than 3/8 inch. 3.10 LINTELS A. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick -size units and 24 inches for block -size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. B. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3.11 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. B. Install flashing as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through -wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At masonry -veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, and up face of sheathing at least 8 inches; with upper edge tucked under building paper or building wrap, lapping at least 4 inches. 3. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends and tum up not less than 2 inches to form end dams. 4. Interlock end joints of ribbed sheet metal flashing by overlapping ribs not less than 1-1/2 inches or as recommended by flashing manufacturer, and seal lap with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 5. Install metal drip edges and sealant stops with ribbed sheet metal flashing by interlocking hemmed edges to form hooked seam. Seal seam with elastomeric sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for application indicated. 6. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination. C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with uptumed edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover uptumed edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell. D. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. E. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. at brick veneer, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Space weep holes 32 inches o.c. at single-wythe cmu, unless otherwise indicated. F. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. 3.12 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 12 • C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspectors: Owner will engage qualified independent inspectors to perform inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform inspections. 1. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections indicated below and prepare test reports: 1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. D. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 67. E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, per ASTM C 140. F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, per ASTM C 1019. 3.14 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent non -masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket -and -brush hand -cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.15 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from Project site. UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 13 • • • B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil -contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to Tess than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified fill material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving." 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042000 - 14 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" for installing cast stone units in unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cast Stone: Architectural precast concrete building units intended to simulate natural cut stone. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for cast stone units. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicated types and amounts of pigments used. D. Full -Size Samples: For each type of cast stone unit required. 1. Make available for Architect's review at Project site. 2. Make Samples from materials to be used for units used on Project. 3. Approved Samples may be installed in the Work. E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and testing agency. 1. Include copies of material test reports for completed projects, indicating compliance of cast stone with ASTM C 1364. F. Quality -Control Plan: Manufacturer's written quality -control plan that includes all elements of the Cast Stone Institute's "Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection." G. Material Test Reports: For each mix required to produce cast stone, based on testing according to ASTM C 1364, including test for resistance to freezing and thawing. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units. 1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute or has on file and follows a written quality -control plan approved by Architect that includes all elements of the Cast Stone Institute's "Quality Control Procedures Required for Plant Inspection." B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. C. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through one source from a single manufacturer. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 1 r D. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. E. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to minimize the need for on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Pack, handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide -belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units, if required, using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with non -staining, waterproof covers. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store installation materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold -Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold -Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain until cast stone has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. B. Hot -Weather Requirements: Comply with hot -weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CAST STONE MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following: B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation as needed to produce required textures and colors as needed to produce required cast stone colors. E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral -oxide pigments or colored water -reducing admixtures; color stable, non -fading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. F. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures unless specified or approved in writing by Architect. 1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6 percent, except do not add to zero - slump concrete mixes. 4. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A. 5. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 2 • 6. Water -Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E. G. Reinforcement Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615. Use galvanized or epoxy -coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material. 1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.2 CAST STONE UNITS A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry tamp or wet -cast method. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666, Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364, or are made from cast stone that has a history of successful resistance to freezing and thawing. B. Fabricate units with sharp anis and details accurately reproduced with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated. C. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater, but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces. D. Cure units by one of the following methods: 1. Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F or above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours. 2. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours. 3. Cure units to comply with one of the following: a. Not less than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above. b. Not less than 6 days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above. c. Not less than 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above. d. Not less than 8 days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above. E. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. F. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Provide mortar materials that comply with Division Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240, ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304. B. Dowels: Round stainless-steel bars complying with ASTM A 276, Type 304, and 1/2 -inch diameter. C. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner. Manufacturer's standard -strength, general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other construction stains from new masonry surfaces without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by cast stone manufacturer and expressly approved by leaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials. 1. Manufacturers: a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. ProSoCo, Inc. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 3 • 2.5 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Division Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for mortar mixes. 2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according 1:o ASTM C 1364. 1. Include one test for resistance to freezing and thawing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of cast stone. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division Section 042000 "Unit Masonry." B. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. C. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. D. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated. 1. If not indicated, set units with joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. E. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. F. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. G. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide control and pressure -relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT -FILLED JOINTS A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniform joints. B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout. CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 4 • • C. Fill anchor holes with sealant. Where dowel holes occur at pressure -relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels. D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed. 1. Form open joint of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch. F. Prepare joints and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In -Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean cast stone with proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 047200 CAST STONE MASONRY 047200 - 5 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for independent testing agency procedures and administrative requirements. 2. Division Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for miscellaneous steel fabrications and other metal items not defined as structural steel. 3. Division 09 painting Sections for surface preparation and priming requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural -steel frame, as classified by AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," that support design loads. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural -steel fabricator to withstand Toads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated. 1. Select and complete connections using AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Load and Resistance Factor Design," Volume 2, Part 9 and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," Part 4. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Fabricator's responsibilities include using a qualified professional engineer to prepare structural analysis data for structural -steel connections. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural -steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip -critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. For structural -steel connections indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator. E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. 3. Non -shrank grout. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 1 • F. Source quality -control test reports. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category Sbd. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." 2. AISC's "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" and "Supplement No. 2." 3. AISC's Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings." 4. AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design." 5. AISC's "Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections." 6. AISC's "Specification for Load and Resistance Factor Design of Single -Angle Members." 7. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 orA 490 Bolts." E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Fumish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL -STEEL MATERIALS A. W -Shapes: ASTM A 36 and ASTM A 529, Grade 50. B. Channels, Angles, M, S -Shapes: ASTM A 36. C. Plate and Bar. ASTM A 36. D. Cold -Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B., and standard weight class 1. Finish: Black. F. Medium -Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A 27, Grade 65-35, carbon steel. G. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High -Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563 heavy hex carbon -steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 hardened carbon -steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 2 • B. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed -stud type, cold -finished carbon steel; AWS D1.1, Type B. C. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. 1. Configuration: Straight, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Plain. D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, straight. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36 carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Plain. E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 193. 1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F 436 hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: Plain. F. Clevises and Tumbuckles: ASTM A 108, Grade 1035, cold -finished carbon steel. G. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1030, cold -finished carbon steel. H. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A 108, Grade 1018, cold -finished carbon steel. I. Anchor Bolts exposed to weather. ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex -headed bolts and carbon -steel nuts; flat hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153, Class C. 2.3 PRIMER A. Primer. SSPC-Paint 25, Type II, iron oxide, zinc oxide, raw linseed oil, and alkyd. B. Primer. Fabricator's standard lead and chromate -free, non -asphaltic, rust -inhibiting primer. 2.4 GROUT A. Non-metallic, Shrinkage -Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, non -corrosive, non -staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30 -minute working time. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design." 1. Camber structural -steel members where indicated. 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6 and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match -mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural -steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop -priming operations. B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. C. Bolt Holes: Cut, dell, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 3 • E. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturer's written instructions. F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for passage of other work through steel framing members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. Do not thermally cut bolt holes or enlarge holes by buming. 2. Base -Plate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other work. 2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members full depth. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials, where required to meet fire rating requirements. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, comers, edges, and exposed surfaces. 1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. 2. Apply two coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. 2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural -steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop -welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: 1. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 2. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. E. In addition to visual inspection, shop -welded shear connectors will be tested and inspected according to requirements in AWS D1.1 for stud welding and as follows: 1. Bend tests will be performed if visual inspections reveal either a less -than- continuous 360 -degree flash or welding repairs to any shear connector. 2. Tests will be conducted on additional shear connectors if weld fracture occurs on shear connectors already tested, according to requirements in AWS D1.1. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 4 • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry -bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design." B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry -bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate. 3. Snug -tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage -resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection, unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by buming or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. H. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed -stud shear connectors according to AWS D1.1 and manufacturers written instructions. 3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High -Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened. STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 5 • • • B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," AISC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Steel Buildings," and AISC's "Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design," for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Shop -bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts." C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. b. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not cornply with the Contract Documents. 3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists and accessories, bearing plates, and abutting structural steel. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand -tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power -tool cleaning. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200 - 6 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 052100 - STEEL JOIST FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. K -series steel joists 2. KCS -type K -series steel joists 3. LH -Series, long -span steel joists 4. DLH-Series, deep long -span steel joists 5. Joist girders 6. Joist accessories B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing bearing plates in unit masonry. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SJI "Specifications": Steel Joist Institute's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders." B. Special Joists: Steel joists or joist girders requiring modification by manufacturer to support non-uniform, unequal, or special loading conditions that invalidate load tables in SJI's "Specifications." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide special joists and connections capable of withstanding design loads indicated. B. Design special joists to withstand design loads with live Toad deflections no greater than the following: 1. Roof Joists: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of joist, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, designation, number, type, location, and spacing of joists. Include joining and anchorage details, bracing, bridging, joist accessories; splice and connection locations and details; and attachments to other construction. 1. Indicate locations and details of bearing plates to be embedded in other construction. 2. Comprehensive engineering analysis of special joists signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for its preparation. C. Welding certificates. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that joists comply with requirements. E. Mill Certificates: Signed by bolt manufacturers certifying that bolts comply with requirements. F. Qualification Data: For manufacturer. G. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 1 • H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel joists. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer certified by SJI to manufacture joists complying with applicable standard specifications and load tables of SJI "Specifications." 1. Manufacturers responsibilities include providing professional engineering services for designing special joists to comply with performance requirements. B. SJI Specifications: Comply with standard specifications in SJI's "Specifications" that are applicable to types of joists indicated. C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.° 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle joists as recommended in SJI's "Specifications." B. Protect joists from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. 1.8 SEQUENCING A. Deliver steel bearing plates to be built into masonry construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Steel: Comply with SJI's "Specifications" for web and steel -angle chord members. B. Steel Bearing Plates: ASTM A 36. C. Carbon -Steel Bolts and Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A 307, Grade A, carbon -steel, hex -head bolts and threaded fasteners; carbon -steel nuts; and flat, unhardened steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain, uncoated Hot -dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153, Class C. D. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20. 2.2 PRIMERS A. Primer. SSPC-Paint 15, or manufacturer's standard shop primer complying with performance requirements in SSPC-Paint 15. 2.3 K -SERIES STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists of type indicated according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K -Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members, underslung ends, and parallel top chord. 1. Joist Type: K -series steel joists and KCS -type K -series steel joists. B. Steel Joist Substitutes: Manufacture according to "Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists, K - Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle or -channel members. C. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 2 • E. Top -Chord Extensions: Extend top chords of joists with SJI's Type S top -chord extensions where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." F. Extended Ends: Extend bearing ends of joists with SJI's Type R extended ends where indicated, complying with SJI's "Specifications." G. Do not camber joists. H. Camber joists according to SJI's "Specifications or as indicated on drawings. I. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturers standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.4 LONG -SPAN STEEL JOISTS A. Manufacture steel joists according to "Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists, LH -Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists, DLH-Series" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members; of joist type and end and top -chord arrangements as follows: 1. Joist Type: LH -series steel joists. 2. End Arrangement: Underslung. 3. Top -Chord Arrangement: Pitched 3/8 inch per 12 inches, 2 way. B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joists. D. Camber long -span steel joists according to SJI's "Specifications." E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturers standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.5 JOIST GIRDERS A. Manufacture joist girders according to "Standard Specifications for Joist Girders" in SJI's "Specifications," with steel -angle top- and bottom -chord members; with end and top -chord arrangements as follows: 1. End Arrangement: Underslung. 2. Top -Chord Arrangement: Parallel. B. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for shop welding, appearance, quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. C. Provide holes in chord members for connecting and securing other construction to joist girders. D. Camber joist girders according to SJI's "Specifications." E. Equip bearing ends of joists with manufacturers standard beveled ends or sloped shoes if joist slope exceeds 1/4 inch per 12 inches. 2.6 JOIST ACCESSORIES A. Bridging: Provide bridging anchors and number of rows of horizontal or diagonal bridging of material, size, and type required by SJI's "Specifications" for type of joist, chord size, spacing, and span. Furnish additional erection bridging if required for stability. B. Fabricate steel bearing plates with integral anchorages of sizes and thicknesses indicated. Shop prime paint. C. Steel bearing plates with integral anchorages are specified in Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 3 • D. Supply ceiling extensions, either extended bottom -chord elements or a separate extension unit of enough strength to support ceiling construction. Extend ends to within 1/2 inch of finished wall surface, unless otherwise indicated. E. Supply miscellaneous accessories, including splice plates and bolts required by joist manufacturer to complete joist installation. 2.7 CLEANING AND SHOP PAINTING A. Clean and remove loose scale, heavy rust, and other foreign materials from fabricated joists and accessories by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2 or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. B. Apply 1 coat of shop primer to joists and joist accessories to be primed to provide a continuous, dry paint film not less than 1 mil thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates, embedded bearing plates, and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not install joists until supporting construction is in place and secured. B. Install joists and accessories plumb, square, and true to line; securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Specifications," joist manufacturer's written recommendations, and requirements in this Section. 1. Before installation, splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space, adjust, and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. 3. Install temporary bracing and erection bridging, connections, and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Delay rigidly connecting bottom -chord extensions to columns or supports until dead loads have been applied. C. Field weld joists to supporting steel bearing plates and framework. Coordinate welding sequence and procedure with placement of joists. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. D. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using carbon -steel bolts. E. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts. Comply with RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts" for high-strength structural bolt installation and tightening requirements. F. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection, before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords if terminating at walls or beams. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and bolted connections and to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test and inspection reports. B. Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. C. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested according to AWS D1.1 and the following procedures, as applicable: 1. Radiographic Testing: ASTM E 94. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709. STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 4 • • • 3. Ultrasonic Testing: ASTM E 164. 4. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. D. Bolted connections will be visually inspected. E. High-strength, field -bolted connections will be tested and verified according to procedures in RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts." F. Correct deficiencies in Work that test and inspection reports have indicated are not in compliance with specified requirements. G. Additional testing will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.4 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Touchup Painting: After installation, promptly clean, prepare, and prime or reprime field connections, rust spots, and abraded surfaces of prime -painted joists, bearing plates, abutting structural steel, and accessories. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 2, or power -tool cleaning, SSPC-SP 3. 2. Apply a compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that joists and accessories are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 052100 STEEL JOIST FRAMING 052100 - 5 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof deck. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for framing deck openings with miscellaneous steel shapes. 2. Division 09 painting Sections for repair painting of primed deck. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction. C. Product Certificates: For steel deck, signed by product manufacturer. D. Welding certificates. E. Field quality -control test and inspection reports. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that each of the following complies with requirements: 1. Power -actuated mechanical fasteners. G. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. D. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members." E. FMG Listing: Provide steel roof deck evaluated by FMG and listed in its "Approval Guide, Building Materials" for Class 1 fire rating and Class 1-90 windstorm ratings. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 1 • 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Steel Deck: a. Epic Metals Corporation. b. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. c. Roof Deck, Inc. d. United Steel Deck, Inc. e. Verco Manufacturing Co. f. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation. 2.2 ROOF DECK A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top -flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following: 1. Prime -Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked -on, rust -inhibitive primer. a. Color. Gray or white 2. Galvanized and Shop -Primed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33, G60 zinc coating; cleaned, pretreated, and primed with manufacturer's standard baked -on, rust -inhibitive primer a. Color. Gray or white 3. Deck Profile: Type WR, wide rib 4. Profile Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings 5. Design Uncoated -Steel Thickness: 0.0295 inch (22 gauge), unless otherwise indicated on Drawings 6. Span Condition: Triple span or more 7. Side Laps: Overlapped 8. End Joints: Overlapped 2° minimum 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, low-velocity, power -actuated or pneumatically driven carbon - steel fasteners; or self -drilling, self -threading screws. C. Side -Lap Fasteners: Corrosion -resistant, hexagonal washer head; self -drilling, carbon -steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed -cell, synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not Tess than 0.0359 -inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Column Closures, End Closures, Z -Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck, unless otherwise indicated. G. Weld Washers: Uncoated steel sheet, shaped to fit deck rib, 0.0598 inch thick, with factory -punched hole of 3/8 -inch minimum diameter. H. Flat Sump Plate: Single -piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 2 • • Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. J. Repair Paint: Manufacturers standard rust -inhibitive primer of same color as primer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels, if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side -lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work. H. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. I. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 ROOF -DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof -deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long, and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter. 5/8 inch nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support. Space welds 12 inches apart in the field of roof and 6 inches apart in roof comers and perimeter, based on roof -area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side -Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of 1/2 of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self -drilling, No. 10 diameter or larger, carbon -steel screws. 2. Fasten with a minimum of 1 -1/2 -inch long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. D. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each comer. 1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld. STEEL DECKING 053100 - 3 • E. Miscellaneous Roof -Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation. 1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof -deck panels, unless otherwise indicated. F. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements. 3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime - painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint, of same color as adjacent shop -primed deck, to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view. 2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions to ensure that steel deck is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 053100 STEEL DECKING 053100 - 4 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 054000 - COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing. 2. Exterior non -load-bearing wall framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division Section 092216 "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for interior non -load-bearing, metal -stud framing and ceiling -suspension assemblies. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide cold -formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on structural drawings. 2. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Load -Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the wall height. b. Exterior Non -Load -Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. c. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. 3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 4. Design framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances and to maintain clearances at openings. B. Cold -Formed Steel Framing, General: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Headers: Design according to AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." 2. Design exterior non -load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold -formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold -formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work. 1. For cold -formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1 • B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold -formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. C. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base -metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic -coating thickness. D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." E. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold -Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions." 1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - Header Design." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold -formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold -formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold -formed metal framing by one of the following: 1. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries Company. 2. Unimast. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows: 1. Grade: ST33H. 2. Coating: G60. B. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90. 2.3 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Steel Box or Back -to -Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C -shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and asfollows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 2 inches. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 2 • 2.4 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs. 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep -leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch. 2. Flange Width: 1 inch plus the design gap for 1 -story structures. 2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel -framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. Anchor clips. 5. End clips. 6. Foundation clips. 7. Gusset plates. 8. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 9. Hangers and end closures. 10. Hole reinforcing plates. 11. Backer plates. 2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36, zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon -steel hex -headed bolts and carbon -steel nuts; and flat, hardened -steel washers; zinc coated by hot -dip process according to ASTM A 153, Class C. C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a Toad equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Power -Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion -resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion -resistant -coated, self -drilling, self -tapping steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low -profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD -P-21035. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 3 • B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Non-metallic, Non -shrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, non -corrosive, non -staining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage -compensating agents, and plasticizing and water -reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30 -minute working time. D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multi -monomer plastic, non -leaching. E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold -formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold -formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out -of -square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied (when required by construction), attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials, when required. B. After applying sprayed fire -resistive materials (when required by construction), remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold -formed framing without reducing thickness of fire - resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire -resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire - resistive materials from damage, when required. C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction. D. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 4 • 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold -formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold -formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold -Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop or field -fabricated, cold -formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true -to - line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. D. Install cold -formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold -formed metal framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold -formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation, specified in Division Section 072100 'Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold -formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at comers and ends, and at spacings as follows: 1. Anchor Spacing: 24 inches. B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations. D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall -framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 5 • F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated. G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip -angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates. 1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. 2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full -height wall studs. H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. 1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or Toad resulting from item supported. I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced 48 inches. Fasten at each stud intersection installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip -angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure. K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.5 EXTERIOR NON -LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches. C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non -plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. D. Isolate non -load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single -leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure. E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 12 inches of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud -track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. a. Install solid blocking at 96 -inch centers. 2. Bridging: Cold -rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and stable wall -framing system. 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 6 • • • B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold - formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure that cold -formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 054000 COLD -FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 7 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment. 2. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other Sections. 3. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 4. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete not specified in other Sections. 5. Extruded Aluminum Trellis. 6. Metal ladders. 7. Metal bollards. B. Products fumished, but not installed, under this Section include the following: 1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, and wedge -type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, wedge -type inserts and other items indicated to be cast into concrete. 2. Division Section 042000 "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other items indicated to be built into unit masonry. 3. Division Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." 4. Division Section 055213 "Pipe and Tube Railings." 5. Division Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry" for metal framing anchors. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. B. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. 2. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. 3. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1 r • C. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code—Sheet Steel." 3. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate wall and other contiguous construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 2. Provide allowance for trimming and fitting at site. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Fumish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.2 NONFERROUS METALS A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6. 2.3 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. W -Shapes: ASTM A36 and ASTM A529, Grade 50. C. Stainless -Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304. D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold -formed steel tubing. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold -formed metal channels with continuous slot complying with MFMA-3. 1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Material: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 653, structural steel, Grade 33, with G90 coating; 0.079 -inch nominal thickness. G. Cast Iron: ASTM A 48, Class 30, unless another class is indicated or required by structural loads. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2 • 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc - plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon -head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. D. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489. E. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. G. Wood Screws: Fiat head, ASME B18.6.1. H. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1. I. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1. J. Cast -in -Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a Toad equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot -dip galvanized per ASTM A 153. K. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the Toad imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon -steel components zinc -plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. 2. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 or 2 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Universal Shop Primer. Fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with MPI#79. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 Ib/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High -zinc -dust -content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. D. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. E. Non -Shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory -packaged, non -staining, non -corrosive, non-gaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. F. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division Section 033000 "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for normal -weight, air -entrained, ready -mix concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless otherwise indicated. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3 • • 2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals leanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Form bent -metal comers to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. D. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. E. Weld comers and seams continuously to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat -head (countersunk) screws or bolts, unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads. 1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6 -inch embedment and 2 -inch hook, not less than 8 inches from ends and comers of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work. B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. 1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated. 2. Fumish inserts if units are installed after concrete is placed. C. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated. 2.8 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated. B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of dear span but not less than 8 inches, unless otherwise indicated. C. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4 • • 2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. B. Galvanize plates after fabrication. 2.10 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with not less than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter comers and use concealed field splices where possible. B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry construction. C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim and interior miscellaneous steel trim, where indicated. 2.12 METAL LADDERS A. General: 1. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space side -rails 18 inches apart, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted brackets, made from same metal as ladder. B. Steel Ladders: 1. Side -rails: Continuous, 1/4 -by -2 -inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 2. Rungs: 1 -inch- square steel bars. 3. Fit rungs in centerline of side -rails; plug -weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 4. Provide non -slip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded to rung by a proprietary process. 5. Prime interior ladders, where indicated, including brackets and fasteners, with universal primer. 2.13 METAL BOLLARDS A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe. 2.14 TRELLIS A. Trellis framing members shall be constructed using a 2 -by -8 -inch extruded aluminum tube with a wall thickness of 0.125°. All exterior comer conditions will be machined lap joints with a mechanically fastened connection. 1. Where additional reinforcing is required, hidden angle connections will also be used at the comers. B. Trellis wall fascia shall be 2 -by -8 -inch extruded aluminum tube to match main trellis construction. Ship in lengths to be field cut to fit the desired locations. All comer connections shall be factory assembled. C. Main trellis areas shall be 0.125" aluminum sheet in -fill panels with framing as required per material spans and loads in-between trellis framing members as indicated on Drawings. D. Stainless steel threaded rod and turnbuckle assemblies for use to support the trellises at the locations as indicated on Drawings. 2.15 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Material: Cold formed steel, with corrosion -resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5 • • 1. metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot -dip galvanized steel. 2. Slotted -Steel Channel Supports: Flange edges tumed toward web, and 9/16 inch diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches o.c., in webs. a. Channel thickness: Selected to suit structural loading. 1) Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channel supports. 3. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C - damps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring -steel clamps or click -type hangers. 4. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. 5. Expansion Anchors: Carbon -steel wedge or sleeve type. 6. Toggle Bolts: All -steel springhead type. 7. Powder -Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel. B. Coordinate with other trades the locations of anchors, sleeves, inserts and supports and insure that they are properly installed. C. Openings and sleeves shall be set true to line, level, plumb and position and shall be so maintained during construction. Where sleeves and openings are provided in poured concrete, inspect same during and after concrete is poured to insure proper position and correct any deviation. D. Use of powder actuated fasteners and devices is permitted with the following requirements: 1. Fasteners shall be applied with low velocity tool. 2. Load capacity per fastener (9/64" shank diameter) a. For 1" penetration in concrete, 125 lbs. per fastener b. For 1-1/4" penetration in concrete, 225 lbs. per fastener 3. Fasteners shall be located in thickest part of slab. 4. Devices shall comply with OSHA requirements. E. Use of lead shield expansion anchors is not permitted. F. For point -of -attachment weight of 100 lbs. or Tess, fasten items as follows: 1. On wood, use wood screws 2. On concrete and solid masonry that is already in place, use self -drilling concrete anchors or expansion bolt and couplings 3. On hollow construction, use toggle bolts 4. On solid metal, use machine screws in tapped holes, or welded studs 5. On structural steel, use beam damps G. For point -of -attachment weights from 100 lbs. to 300 lbs. provide supports as follows: 1. At cast -in-place concrete slabs, use concrete inserts in bottom of slab, with 1/8° slip -through steel rods set transverse to the reinforcing steel 2. At concrete slab already in place, use 16" x 8° x '/" steel plates at top of slab, with through bolts welded in place. The plates shall be chased in and grouted flush, where no fill is to be applied. H. For point -of -attachment weights over 300 lbs., provide supports as follows: 1. At cast -in-place concrete slabs, use 16" x 8° x'/2 steel plate, with through bolts welded in place. Top of plate shall be 1-1/2" below top of slab or on top of slab where a fill slab is to be installed. 2.16 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. 2.17 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. B. High -Performance Organic Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: Match Architects sample. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6 • • • 2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanizing: Hot -dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below. 1. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. 2. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware. B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous -metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed metal fabrications: 1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1 B): SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 2. Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." C. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete, sprayed -on fireproofing, or masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint comers, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot -dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. D. Fastening to In -Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors. E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. 3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond -reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates. B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. Use non -shrink grout. 1. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured. METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7 • • r B. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0 -mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8 • • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel pipe railings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength. B. Structural Performance: Provide railings capable of withstanding the effects of gravity following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: 1. Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 vertically downward. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. design working loads and the lbf/ ft applied C. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior railings that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain railing through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1 • • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. 2.2 STEEL AND IRON A. Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type F or Type S, Grade B, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless another grade and weight are required by structural loads. 1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated. B. Steel Bars: ASTM A 36. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Zinc -Rich Primer. Complying with SSPC-Paint 20 or SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with topcoat. 1. Use primer with a VOC content of 420 g/L (3.5 Ib/gal.) or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Epoxy Zinc -Rich Primer CM18/19. b. ICI Devoe Coatings; Catha-Coat 313. c. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; Aquapon Zinc -Rich Primer 97-670. d. Sherwin-Williams Company; Corothane I GalvaPac Zinc Primer. e. Tnemec Company, Inc.; Tneme-Zinc 90-97. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. D. Non -Shrink, Non -Metallic Grout Factory -packaged, non -staining, non -corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. E. Anchoring Cement: Factory -packaged, non -shrink, non -staining, hydraulic -controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. 1. Water -Resistant Product: At exterior locations provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage. B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. C. Fomi work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. D. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. E. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections, unless otherwise indicated. F. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide dose fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2 • 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces. G. Form changes in direction by radius bends of radius indicated. H. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2.6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES A. Galvanized Railings: Hot -dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings after fabrication. B. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. C. Preparation for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with metallic -phosphate process. D. Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after fabrication. 2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3.2 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in Part 2 "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field. 3.3 ANCHORING POSTS A. Form or core -drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with non -shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions. B. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, dean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC- PA 1 for touching up shop -painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3 • • • 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary, protective coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Retum items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units. END OF SECTION 055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Wood blocking and nailers. 5. Wood furring and grounds. 6. Plywood backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing." 2. Division 06 Section "Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses." 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber. Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. SPIB: The Southem Pine Inspection Bureau. 4. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 5. WWPA: Westem Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire -retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For products receiving a waterbome treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 4. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire retardant treated wood. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1 • • 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or set surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Lumber. DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules -writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project. 1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. 2.2 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in unexcavated areas. 4. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs -on -grade. 2.3 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 1. Use Exterior type for exterior locations and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof framing, framing in attic spaces, and where indicated. 3. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2 • Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Framing for non -load-bearing partitions. 3. Framing for non -load-bearing exterior walls. 4. Roof construction. 5. Plywood backing panels. 2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent. B. Non -Load -Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southem pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce -pine -fir, NLGA. 4. Northern species; NLGA. C. Exterior and Load -Bearing Walls: Construction or No. 1 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southem pine; SPIB. 3. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. D. Ceiling Joists (Non -Load -Bearing): Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. E. Joists and Other Framing Not Listed Above: Construction or No. 2 grade and any of the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Southern pine; SPIB. 3. Douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. F. Sleepers: Construction or No. 2 grade and anhy of the following species: 1. Redwood; RIS 2. Cedar, NCLIB, WWPA or NLGA 2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Laminated -Veneer Lumber. Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Weyerhaeuser Company (I Level) b. Boise Cascade Corporation. c. Georgia-Pacific. d. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi for 12 -inch nominal depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi. B. Parallel -Strand Lumber. Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior -type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and containing no urea formaldehyde. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Weyerhaeuser Company (I Level) 2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12 -inch nominal depth members. 3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,200,000 psi. C. Wood I -Joists: Prefabricated units, I -shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood -based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055. 1. Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Weyerhaeuser Company ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3 • 1) I -Level Truss Joist Commercial; Contact, Julia Hall; Telephone, (877) 371-0448; Email, julia.hall@weyerhaeusercom or 1-800-456-4787 2. Provide I joists manufactured without urea formaldehyde. 3. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1. 4. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated. 5. Provide units complying with APA PRI -400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species: 1. Hem -fir (north); NLGA. 2. Mixed southem pine; SPIB. 3. Spruce -pine -fir, NLGA. 4. Northern species; NLGA. C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and any of the following species and grades: 1. Mixed southem pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Hem -fir or hem -fir (north), Construction or 2 Common grade; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. 3. Spruce -pine -fir (south) or spruce -pine -fir, Construction or 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent -over nails and damage to paneling. 2.7 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C -D Plugged, fire -retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2 -inch nominal thickness. 2.8 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure -preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153 of Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4 • F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the Toad imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1_ Material: Carbon -steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe2n 5. 2.9 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc. B. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design Toads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturer listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot -dip, zinc -coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 coating designation. 1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated. D. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304. 1. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. E. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2 -inch long seat and 1 -1/4 -inch wide nailing flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth. 1. Thickness: 0.062 inch. F. I -Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2 -inch long seat and 1 -1/4 -inch wide nailing flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord. . 1. Thickness: 0.062 inch. G. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member. 1. Strap Width: 2 inches. 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch. H. Bridging: Rigid, V -section, nail -less type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing. I. Post Bases: Adjustable -socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch above base and with 2 -inch minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick. J. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports. 1. Width: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.062 inch. 3. Length: 16 inches. K. Floor -to -Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long. L. Hold -Downs: Brackets for bolting to wall studs and securing to foundation walls with anchor bolts or to other hold-downs with threaded rods and designed with first of two bolts placed seven bolt diameters from reinforced base. 1. Bolt Diameter. 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 2-1/2 inches. 3. Body Thickness: 0.138 inch. 4. Base Reinforcement Thickness: 0.239 inch. M. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by 9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5 • • N. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040 inch thick with hemmed edges. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill -Sealer Gaskets: Closed -cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Water -Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active ingredient. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated. F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board at comers and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. J. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated. 3.2 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION A. Install where indicated and where required for attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required for tolerance of finish work. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6 • • B. Furring to Receive Plywood Paneling: Install 1 -by -3 -inch nominal size furring horizontally and vertically at 24 inches o.c. C. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1 -by -2 -inch nominal- size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2 -inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non -load-bearing partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls, provide 2 -by -6 -inch nominal size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2 -by -6 -inch or 2 -by -4 -inch nominal size wood studs spaced 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches high, using members of 2 -inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. B. Construct comers and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used for interior non -load-bearing partitions. C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs. 1. For load-bearing walls, provide double -jamb studs for openings 60 inches and Tess in width, and triple -jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated or, if not indicated, according to recommendations of AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." 3.5 CEILING JOIST FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and support ends of each member with not less than 1-1/2 inches of bearing on wood or metal, or 3 inches on masonry. Attach floor joists as follows: 1. Where supported on wood members, by toe nailing or by using metal framing anchors. 2. Where framed into wood supporting members, by using wood ledgers as indicated or, if not indicated, by using metal joist hangers. B. Frame openings with headers and trimmers supported by metal joist hangers; double headers and trimmers where span of header exceeds 48 inches. C. Do not notch in middle third of joists; limit notches to one-sixth depth of joist, one-third at ends. Do not bore holes larger than 1/3 depth of joist; do not locate loser than 2 inches from top or bottom. D. Provide solid blocking of 2 -inch nominal thickness by depth of joist at ends of joists unless nailed to header or band. E. Lap members framing from opposite sides of beams or partitions not Tess than 4 inches or securely tie opposing members together. Provide solid blocking of 2 -inch nominal thickness by depth of joist over supports. F. Anchor members paralleling masonry with 1/4 -by -1 -1/4 -inch metal strap anchors spaced not more than 96 inches o.c., extending over and fastening to 3 joists. Embed anchors at least 4 inches into grouted masonry with ends bent at right angles and extending 4 inches beyond bend. G. Provide bridging of type indicated below, at intervals of 96 inches o.c., between joists. 1. Diagonal wood bridging formed from bevel -cut, 1 -by -3 -inch nominal size lumber, double-crossed and nailed at both ends to joists. 2. Steel bridging installed to comply with bridging manufacturer's written instructions. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7 • • • B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. END OF SECTION 061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8 • • McDonald's USA, LCC Project Manual SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Building wrap. 4. Flexible flashing at openings in sheathing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for plywood backing panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory -fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood -preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. For products receiving a waterbome treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 4. For building wrap, include data on air -/moisture -infiltration protection based on testing according to referenced standards. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire -resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Plywood: Either DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, unless otherwise indicated. B. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated. C. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. 2.2 PRESERVATIVE -TREATED PLYWOOD A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C9. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. SHEATHING 061600 - 1 • B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat all plywood, unless otherwise indicated and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.3 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch. 2.4 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than 48/24. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 3/4 inch. 2.5 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot -dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power -Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold -Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic -polymer or other corrosion -protective coating having a salt -spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 2.6 WEATHER -RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER A. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder, with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E 84; UV stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); Tyvek CommercialWrap. b. Architect approved equal. 2. Water -Vapor Permeance: Not less than 200 g through 1 sq. m of surface in 24 hours per ASTM E 96, Desiccant Method (Procedure A). 3. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months. B. Building -Wrap Tape: Pressure -sensitive plastic tape recommended by building -wrap manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both adhesives and panels. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized -asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross -laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.040 inch. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705-TWF Thru-Wall Flashing. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Vycor Plus Self -Adhered Flashing. SHEATHING 061600 - 2 • c. MFM Building Products Corp.; Window Wrap. d. Polyguard Products, Inc.; Polyguard 300. e. Protecto Wrap Company; BT -20 XL. C. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible 'flashing for substrate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power -driven fasteners. 2. Table 23 -II -B-1, "Nailing Schedule," and Table 23 -II -B-2, "Wood Structural Panel Roof Sheathing Nailing Schedule," in ICBO's "Uniform Building Code." D. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint -sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast. 3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations in APA Form No. E30S, "Engineered Wood Construction Guide," for types of structural -use panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below. 1. Wall and Roof Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. Apply a continuous bead of glue to framing members at edges of wall sheathing panels. b. Screw to cold -formed metal framing. c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends. 3.3 WEATHER -RESISTANT SHEATHING -PAPER INSTALLATION A. General: Cover sheathing with weather -resistant sheathing paper as follows: 1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control - joint locations. 2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4 -inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated. B. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape. 2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal comers with tape. 3.4 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions. 1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer. SHEATHING 061600 - 3 • • • 2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width. 3. Lap flashing over weather -resistant building wrap at bottom and sides of openings. 4. Lap weather -resistant building wrap over flashing at heads of openings. 5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates. END OF SECTION 061600 SHEATHING 061600 - 4 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 061755 - OPEN WEB TRUSSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This work includes the complete fumishings and installation of all iLevel Trus Joist Commercial open -web trusses, as shown on Drawings herein specified and necessary to complete the Work B. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood roof trusses. 2. Wood truss bracing. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide open web trusses capable of withstanding design Toads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1 unless more stringent requirements are specified below. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span. B. Delegated Design: Design open -web trusses, including comprehensive load and reaction engineering calculation analysis, Shop Drawings, and other structural data by qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. C. Seismic Performance: Structural open web trusses shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1.4 Fire Rating/Sound Ratings A. Fire and sound ratings are to be established in accordance with assemblies detailed in ICC ES Legacy Report No. PFC-4354, or in the Directory of Listed Products published by Intertek Testing Services. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative -treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors, include installation instructions 4. For metal truss accessories and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details for trusses. 1. Shop Drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and placement in the building shall be provided by iLevel Trus Joist Commercial. 2. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 3. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber. 4. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads. 5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal connector plates. 6. Show splice details and bearing details. OPEN WEB TRUSSES 061755 - 1 • 7. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Delegated -Design Submittal: Provided by iLevel Trus Joist, indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation D. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that TJI Joists complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each of the open -web trusses shall be identified by a stamp indicating the truss series, ICC ES evaluation report number, manufacturer's name, plant number, date of fabrication, and the independent inspection agency's logo. B. Open -web truss products shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth in the ICC ES Legacy Report No. PFC-4354, unless otherwise noted C. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality -assurance program that complies with quality -control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third -party inspection by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having jurisdiction. D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's "National Design Specifications for Wood Construction" and "Supplement." 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store open -web trusses to comply with recommendations of TPI HIB 1. Store open -web trusses vertical position, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending, in accordance with manufacturers written recommendations. 2. Protect open -web trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace trusses that are damaged or defective. C. The iLevel Trus Joist Commercial open -web trusses, if stored prior to installation, shall be stored in a vertical position and protected from the weather. They shall be handled with care so they are not damaged 1.8 COORDINATION A. Time delivery and erection of open -web trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying progress of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Products delivered shall be free from manufacturing errors or defects in workmanship and material. Open - web trusses, when correctly installed and maintained, shall be warranted to perform as designed for the normal and expected life of the building structure. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide open -web truss products as manufactured by iLevel Trus Joist Commercial: 1. Base Bid: Due to the customized detailing and engineering characteristics of the roof and/or floor framing assembly, it is a requirement that open -web trusses be used in the base bid. 2. Altemate Manufacturers: Other manufacturers' bids are to be listed in the alternate section of proposal. All framing plans, detailing, and calculations for the altemate bids will be reviewed by Owner, Architect, and Structural Engineer for structural performance, possible conflicts with related trades, and compatibility with the overall building requirements and building code. OPEN WEB TRUSSES 061755 - 2 • 3. Altemate Products: Altemate products will only be permitted if written approval and acceptance is obtained by both Architect/Engineer and Owner in accordance with Division 01 requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Materials shall comply with ICC ES Legacy Report No. PFC-4354. Chord members, web members, connecting pins and bearing hardware/attachments shall be of material and size as required by design. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber. DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for truss chord and web members, of not less than the following grade and the following species: 1. Grade for Chord Members: No. 1 or better. 2. Grade for Web Members: No. 2 or better. 3. Species: Southem pine; SPIB, douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Minimum Chord Size for Roof Trusses: 2 by 6 inches nominal for both top and bottom chords. D. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2.4 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that trusses that are not in contact with the ground and are continuously protected from liquid water may be made from lumber treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed trusses indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed trusses indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat trusses where indicated on Drawings. 2.5 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED WOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20. 1. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof trusses and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed trusses and bracing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. C. For exposed trusses indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. OPEN WEB TRUSSES 061755 - 3 • D. Application: Treat trusses where indicated on Drawings. 2.6 TOLERANCES A. Length Bearing to Bearing: +/- 1/8 -inch for trusses up to 30 feet, +/- 1/4 -inch for trusses more than 30 feet B. Depth: +/- 1/8 -inch C. Camber. 1. Trusses up to 30 feet: +/- 1/8 -inch 2. Trusses greater than 30 feet to 60 feet: +/- 3/8 -inch 3. Trusses greater than 60 feet to 120 feet: +/- 1/2 -inch 2.7 HARDWARE A. Not applicable. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close -fitting joints. B. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated. 1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Open -web trusses shall be installed in accordance with the plans, and any iLevel Trus Joist Commercial shop drawings and installation requirements. Temporary construction Toads that cause stresses beyond design limits are not permitted. 1. Open -web trusses shall be designed to fit the dimensions and loads indicated on approved shop drawings. B. Installation bracing is to be provided by iLevel Trus Joist Commercial to keep the trusses straight and plumb as required, and to assure adequate lateral support for the individual trusses and the entire system until the sheathing material has been applied C. Fabrication and/or cutting shall not proceed until the Architect and/ or Structural Engineer have approved the submittal package. D. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured. E. If trusses are delivered to Project site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing. F. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out -of -plane bending or other causes. G. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated. H. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction. I. Space trusses as indicated on Drawings, adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening. J. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie -downs or floor truss hangers as applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in truss accessories according to manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions. K. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. 1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." OPEN WEB TRUSSES 061755 - 4 • • • L. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1. M. Do not cut or remove truss members. N. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements. 1. Do not alter trusses in field. 3.2 INSTALLATION REVIEW A. Prior to enclosing the open -web trusses, Contractor shall give notification to the iLevel Trus Joist Commercial representative to provide an opportunity for review of the installation. 3.3 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron -treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA -registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes wet, apply EPA - registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA -registered label. C. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating. 1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system manufacturer. END OF SECTION 061755 OPEN WEB TRUSSES 061755 - 5 r McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 061800 - GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes framing using structural glued -laminated timber. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for dimension lumber items associated with structural glued - laminated timber. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Glued -Laminated (Glulam) Timber. An engineered, stress -rated timber product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately parallel longitudinally. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Structural glued -laminated timber and connectors shall withstand the effects of structural loads shown on Drawings without exceeding allowable design working stresses listed in AITC 117 or determined according to ASTM D 3737 and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Seismic Performance: Structural glued -laminated timber and connectors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For connectors, include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate species and laminating combination, adhesive type, and other variables in required work. C. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural glued -laminated timber complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory -glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA -licensed firrn. 1. Factory mark each piece of structural glued -laminated timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the completed Work. B. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111. B. Individually wrap members using plastic -coated paper covering with water-resistant seams. GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 1 • • • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED -LAMINATED TIMBER A. General: Provide structural glued -laminated timber that complies with AITC 117 or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide structural glued -laminated timber made from single species. 2. Provide structural glued -laminated timber made with wet -use adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559. B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued -Laminated Timber: Douglas fir -larch or southem pine that complies with structural properties indicated. C. Species and Grades for Beams: 1. Species and Beam Stress Classification: Douglas fir -larch or southern pine, 24F -1.8E. 2. Lay-up: Balanced. D. End Sealer. Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross -grain cuts and is compatible with indicated finish. E. Penetrating Sealer. Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood sealer that is compatible with indicated finish. 2.2 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from the following materials: 1. Structural -steel shapes, plates, and flat bars complying with ASTM A 36. 2. Round steel bars complying with ASTM A 575, Grade M 1020. 3. Hot -rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011, Structural Steel, Type SS, Grade 33. B. Fabricate beam seats from steel with 3/8 -inch bearing plates, 3/4 -inch diameter -by -12 -inch long deformed bar anchors, and 0.239 -inch side plates. C. Fabricate beam hangers from steel with 0.179 -inch stirrups and 0.239 -inch top plates. D. Fabricate hinge connectors from steel with 0.179 -inch side plates and 3/4 -inch top and bottom plates. E. Fabricate strap ties from steel, 2-1/2 inches wide by 0.179 inch thick. F. Fabricate tie rods from round steel bars with upset threads connected with forged -steel tumbuckles complying with ASTM A 668. G. Provide bolts, 3/4 inch unless otherwise indicated, complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; nuts complying with ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. H. Provide shear plates, 2-5/8 inches in diameter, complying with ASTM D 5933. I. Finish steel assemblies and fasteners with rust -inhibitive primer, 2 -mil dry film thickness. J. Hot -dip galvanize steel assemblies and fasteners after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to length and drilling bolt holes. 1. Dress exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. B. Camber. Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span. C. End -Cut Sealing: Immediately after end cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross -cut surfaces, keeping surfaces flood coated for not less than 10 minutes. GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 2 • • D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end -coat sealing, apply a heavy saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued -laminated timber, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of structural glued -laminated timber. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect structural glued -laminated timber true and plumb, and with uniform, close -fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Lift with padded slings and protect comers with wood blocking. 2. Install structural glued -laminated timber to comply with Shop Drawings. B. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2 -inch clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches; and do not embed more than 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. C. Fit structural glued -laminated timber by cutting and restoring exposed surfaces to match specified surfacing. 1. Pre -drill for fasteners using timber connectors as templates. 2. Dress exposed surfaces to remove planing or surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper. 3. Coat cross cuts with end sealer. D. Cutting: Avoid cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable, comply with requirements for shop fabrication. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces after completing erection. Replace damaged structural glued -laminated timber if repairs are not approved by Architect. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and damage from work of other trades. 1. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing work specified in Division 09. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting shield. END OF SECTION 061800 GLUED -LAMINATED CONSTRUCTION 061800 - 3 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 061810 - TJI JOISTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This work includes the complete fumishings and installation of all TJI Joists, as shown on Drawings herein specified and necessary to complete the work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide TJI Joists capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. B. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. C. Delegated Design: Design TJI Joists, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. D. Seismic Performance: Structural TJI Joists shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1.4 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS A. Products shall be proven by testing and evaluation in accordance with the provisions of ASTM D-5055. 1.5 FIRE RATING/ SOUND RATINGS A. Fire and sound ratings are to be established in accordance with the assemblies detailed in ICC -ES Report No. ESR -1153, or the Directory of Listed Products published by Intertek Testing Services 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection. 2. For preservative -treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material. 3. For connectors, include installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop Drawings showing layout and detail necessary for determining fit and placement in the building shall be provided by iLevel Trus Joist Commercial 2. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss required. 3. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber 4. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss members due to design loads 5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, and orientation. 6. Show splice details and bearing details TJI JOISTS 061810 - 1 • • 7. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation C. Delegated -Design Submittal: Provided by iLevel Trus Joist, to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. D. Certificates of Conformance: Issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that TJI Joists complies with requirements in AITC A190.1. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Each of TJI joist shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist series, ICC -ES report number, manufacturer's name, plant number, date of fabrication, and the independent inspection agency's logo B. TJI joists shall be designed and manufactured to the standards set forth in the International Code Council Report No. ESR -1153, unless otherwise noted. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle and store TJI joists to comply with recommendations manufacturer 1. Store joists flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending. 2. Protect joists from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. 3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard and replace joists that are damaged or defective 1.9 WARRANTY A. Products delivered shall be free from manufacturing errors or defects in workmanship and material. TJI Joists, when correctly installed and maintained, shall be warranted to perform as designed for the normal and expected life of the building structure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of Design Manufacturer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide TJI Joists products by iLevel Trus Joist: 1. Base Bid: Due to the customized detailing and engineering characteristics of the roof framing assembly, it is a requirement that TJI joists be used in the base bid. 2. Alternate Manufacturers: Other manufacturers' bids are to be listed in the altemate section of proposal. All framing plans, detailing, and calculations for the altemate bids will be reviewed by Owner, Architect, and Structural Engineer for structural performance, possible conflicts with related trades, and compatibility with the overall building requirements and building code. 3. Altemate Products: Altemate products will only be permitted if written approval and acceptance is obtained by both Architect/Engineer and Owner in accordance Division 01 requirements. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flange members, web members and adhesives shall conform to the provisions of ICC -ES Report No. ESR - 1153. 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Lumber. DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. TJI JOISTS 061810 - 2 • 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S. 4. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. B. Grade and Species: Provide visually graded dimension lumber for joist chord and web members, of not Tess than the following grade and the following species: 1. Grade for Chord Members: No. 1 or better. 2. Grade for Web Members: No. 2 or better. 3. Species: Southem pine; SPIB, douglas fir -larch; WCLIB or WWPA. C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2.4 WOOD -PRESERVATIVE -TREATED LUMBER A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2, except that TJI Joists that are not in contact with the ground and are continuously protected from liquid water may be made from lumber treated according to AWPA C31 with inorganic boron (SBX). 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. For exposed TJI Joists indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. B. Kiln -dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. 1. For exposed joists indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. D. Application: Treat trusses where indicated on Drawings. 2.5 FIRE -RETARDANT -TREATED WOOD A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20. 1. Use Interior Type A, High Temperature (HT) for enclosed roof joists and where indicated. 2. Use Interior Type A, unless otherwise indicated. B. Identify fire -retardant -treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. For exposed joists and bracing indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency. C. For exposed joists indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes. D. Application: Treat TJI Joists where indicated on Drawings. 2.6 TOLERANCES A. Joist Depth: +/ - 1/16 -inch B. Joist Flange Width: +/ - 1/16 -inch 2.7 HARDWARE A. Not applicable TJI JOISTS 061810 - 3 • • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates in areas to receive by iLevel Trus Joists, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. TJI joists shall be installed in accordance with the plans, and any iLevel Trus Joist Commercial shop drawings and installation requirements. Temporary construction Toads that cause stresses beyond design limits are not permitted. 1. Safety bracing is to be provided by the Installer to keep the TJI joists straight and plumb as required, and to ensure adequate lateral support for the individual TJI joists members and the entire system until the sheathing material is applied. B. Fabrication and/or cutting shall not proceed until Architect and/ or Structural Engineer have approved the submittal package. C. General: Erect TJI joists true and plumb, and with uniform, dose -fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until permanent supporting members are in place. 1. Install TJI joists to comply with Shop Drawings. D. Framing Built into Masonry: Provide 1/2 -inch clearance at tops, sides, and ends of members built into masonry; bevel cut ends 3 inches; and do not embed more than 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION REVIEW A. Prior to enclosing the TJI joists, Contractor shall give notification to the iLevel Trus Joist Commercial representative to provide an opportunity for review of the installation. END OF SECTION 061810 TJI JOISTS 061810 - 4 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Solid -surfacing -material countertops. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and plywood required for installing solid surfacing countertop materials and work concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood blocking for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For panel products solid -surfacing material. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets and soap dispensers installed in architectural woodwork. C. Samples: Solid -surfacing materials, 6 inches square. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurernents on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 -1 • r 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Solid -Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company. 2. Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated. 3. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Concealed Wood Blocking: As specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." B. Plywood: As specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed -steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled -in-place anchors. D. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. 2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium -grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. • Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. C. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. D. Shop -cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive plumbing fixtures and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing -in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 2.4 SOLID -SURFACING -MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS A. Grade: Premium. B. Solid -Surfacing -Material Thickness: 3/4 inch. C. Colors, Pattems, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid -surfacing material complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2 • D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid -surfacing -material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate tops with shop -applied edges of materials and configuration indicated. E. Install integral sink bowls in countertops in shop. F. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispensers in shop. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing, examine shop -fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. C. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through comer blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid -surfacing -material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Calk space between woodwork and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." D. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. END OF SECTION 064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass -fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring for installing plastic paneling. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. B. Surface-Buming Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Light Reflectance: Shall meet minimum reflectance values as govemed by CURFFL (Califomia Uniform Retail Food Facilities Law, 2005), where required. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING A. General: Gelcoat -finished, glass -fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kemlite Company Inc. b. Marlite. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.12 inch. 3. Surface Finish: Molded pebble texture. 4. Color. White. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturers standard two-piece, snap -on vinyl extrusions designed to cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside comers, outside comers, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color. White. B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 1 • C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves routed in edges of factory -laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. D. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer. 1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Sealant: Single -component, mildew -resistant, neutral -curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at comers are not less than 18 inches wide. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at panel joint with trim accessories locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate panel joints with trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install trim accessories with adhesive and nails. Do not fasten through panels. D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside comer trim in a bead of sealant. E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. F. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures. Fill space with sealant. G. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains. END OF SECTION 066400 PLASTIC PANELING 066400 - 2 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 071113 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Cold -applied, emulsified -asphalt dampproofing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include recommendations for method of application, primer, number of coats, coverage or thickness, and protection course. B. Material Certificates: For each product, signed by manufacturers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers through one source from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials recommended by manufacturer of primary materials. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 COLD -APPLIED, EMULSIFIED -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. ChemMasters Corp. 2. Degussa Building Systems; Sonnebom Brand Products. 3. Koppers Inc. 4. Malarkey Roofing Products. 5. Meadows, W. R., Inc. B. Trowel Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. C. Fibered Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type II, Class 1. D. Brush and Spray Coats: ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1. E. VOC Content: 0.25 Ib/gal. or less. 2.2 PROTECTION COURSE A. Protection Course, Asphalt -Board Type: ASTM D 6506, premolded, 1/8 -inch thick, multi -ply, semirigid board consisting of a mineral -stabilized asphalt core sandwiched between layers of asphalt -saturated felt, and faced on 1 side with polyethylene film. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 1 • B. Protection Course, Roll -Roofing Type: Smooth -surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D 6380, Class S, Type III. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Emulsified -Asphalt Primer. ASTM D 1227, Type III, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended by manufacturer. B. Asphalt -Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type I. C. Patching Compound: Manufacturer's fibered mastic of type recommended by dampproofing manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with dampproofing application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Test for surface moisture according to ASTM D 4263. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection of Other Work: Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to work; fill voids, seal joints, and apply bond breakers if any, as recommended by prime material manufacturer. C. Apply patching compound for filling and patching tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections; cover with asphalt -coated glass fabric. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations unless more stringent requirements are indicated or required by Project conditions to ensure satisfactory performance of dampproofing. 1. Apply additional coats if recommended by manufacturer or if required to achieve coverages indicated. 2. Allow each coat of dampproofing to cure 24 hours before applying subsequent coats. 3. Allow minimum of 24 hours drying time prior to backfilling, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturers written recommendations. B. Apply dampproofing to footings and foundation walls where opposite side of wall faces building interior. 1. Install flashings and comer protection stripping at intemal and extemal comers, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8 -inch -wide strip of asphalt -coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. C. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection on exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls. 1. Lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto flashing, masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 2. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe, and lap dampproofing at least 1/4 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer. 3.4 COLD -APPLIED, EMULSIFIED -ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. On Concrete Foundations: Apply 2 brush or spray coats at not Tess than 1.5 gal./100 sq. ft. for first coat and 1 gal./100 sq. ft. for second coat, 1 fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft., or 1 trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 2 • • • B. On Unparged Masonry Foundation Walls: Apply primer and 1 trowel coat at not less than 5 gal./100 sq. ft.. C. On Unexposed Face of Concrete Retaining Walls: Apply 1 brush or spray coat at not Tess than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft.. D. On Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not Tess than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft.. E. On Exterior Face of Inner Wythe of Cavity Walls: Apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft.. F. On Interior Face of Exterior Masonry Walls: Where above grade and indicated to be furred and finished, apply primer and 1 brush or spray coat at not Tess than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed -and -cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing material manufacturer's written recommendations for attaching protection course. 1. Install protection course within 24 hours of installation of dampproofing (while coating is tacky) to ensure adhesion. 3.6 CLEANING A. Remove dampproofing materials from surfaces not intended to receive dampproofing. END OF SECTION 071113 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 071113 - 3 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single -component polyurethane waterproofing. 2. Molded -sheet drainage panels. B. Related Section: 1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint -sealant materials and installation. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside comers, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. C. Samples: For the following products: 1. Flashing sheet, 10 by 8 inches. 2. Drainage panel, 4 by 4 inches. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Test Reports: For waterproofing, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. F. Field quality -control reports. G. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is acceptable to waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course and molded -sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 1 C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate, when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or when temperatures are less than 5 deg F above dew point. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog or mist, or when such weather conditions are imminent during application and curing period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which waterproofing manufacturer and Installer agree to repair or replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate that exceed 1/16 inch in width. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Installer's Warranty: Specified form, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, for warranty period of two years. 1. Warranty includes removing and reinstalling protection board and drainage panels. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE -COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING A. Single -Component, Unmodified Polyurethane Waterproofing: Comply with ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Neogard, Div of Jones Blair, Permaguard 7410. b. 3M; Scotch Clad 5893/5864. c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 101. 2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with one another and with waterproofing, as demonstrated by waterproofing manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Primer. Manufacturer's standard, factory -formulated polyurethane or epoxy primer. C. Sheet Flashing: 50 -mil minimum, non -staining, uncured sheet neoprene. 1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive. D. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric. E. Joint Sealant: Multi-component polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing, complying with ASTM C 920 Type M, Class 25; Grade NS for sloping and vertical applications or Grade P for deck applications; Use NT exposure; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions. 1. Backer Rod: Closed -cell polyethylene foam. 2.3 PROTECTION COURSE A. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semi-rigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral -reinforced -asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt -saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal. 2. Adhesive: Rubber -based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for type of protection course. COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 2 • • 2.4 MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Non-Woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded -Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface drainage panels consisting of a non -woven, needle -punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a studded, non -biodegradable, molded -plastic -sheet drainage core, with vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Provide dean, dust - free, and dry substrate for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage or overspray affecting other construction. C. Close off deck drains and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of waterproofing fluids. D. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form -release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film -forming coatings from concrete. E. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, and other voids. 3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer. C. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside comers of deck -to -wall butt joints when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 1471 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint -sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat. B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898. COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 3 3.5 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Apply primer over prepared substrate. D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases, with an average dry film thickness of 60 mils and a minimum dry film thickness of 50 mils at any point. 2. Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces. 3. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft. E. Install protection course with butted joints over nominally cured membrane before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. Molded -sheet drainage panels may be used in place of a separate protection course to vertical applications when approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 3.6 MOLDED -SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded -sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile fabric to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded -sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a full time site representative qualified by the waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, and application of the membrane, flashings, protection, and drainage components; and to furnish daily reports to Architect. B. Engage an independent testing agency to observe flood testing and examine underside of decks and terminations for evidence of Teaks during flood testing. 3.8 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING A. Cure waterproofing according to manufacturer's written recommendations, taking care to prevent contamination and damage during application stages and curing. B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 071416 COLD FLUID -APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 4 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 071900 - WATER REPELLENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes penetrating water-repellent coatings for the following surfaces: 1. Concrete unit masonry (unpainted and unglazed). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for integral water-repellent admixture for unit masonry assemblies. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. Include manufacturer's printed statement of VOC content. 2. Include manufacturer's standard colors. B. Samples: For each type of water repellent and substrate indicated, 12 by 12 inches in size, with specified water-repellent treatment applied to half of each Sample. C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that water repellents comply with requirements. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. E. Preconstruction Testing Reports: For water -repellent -treated substrates. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for assemblies. G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM E 548 for testing indicated. C. Test Application: Apply a finish sample for each type of water repellent and substrate required. Duplicate finish of approved sample. 1. Locate each test application as directed by Architect. 2. Size: 25 sq. ft., minimum. 3. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Allow protective treatment test area to cure prior to inspection. 5. Final approval by Architect of water-repellent application will be from test applications. WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - 1 • • • 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Limitations: Proceed with application only when the following existing and forecasted weather and substrate conditions permit water repellents to be applied according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements: 1. Ambient temperature is above 40 deg F. 2. Concrete surfaces and mortar have cured for more than 28 days. 3. Concrete or brick masonry walls are not treated prior to 30 days after building close -in. 4. Rain or snow is not predicted within 24 hours. 5. Application proceeds more than 24 hours after surfaces have been wet. 6. Substrate is not frozen, or surface temperature is above 40 deg F. 7. Windy conditions do not exist that may cause water repellent to be blown onto vegetation or surfaces not intended to be treated. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer and Applicator agrees to repair or replace materials that fail to maintain water repellency within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the product listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 PENETRATING WATER REPELLENTS A. Water Based Silicone Emulsion Water Repellant: Clear -drying, water-based silicone emulsion for weatherproofing concrete block and other porous masonry materials, protects masonry surfaces from graffiti attacks without altering the natural appearance; protects exterior walls exposed to normal weathering. 1. Products: a. ProSoCo, Inc.; Sure Klean Weather Seal Block -Guard and Blok-Guard and Graffiti Control II. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of substances that might interfere with penetration or performance of water repellents. Test for moisture content, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure that surface is dry enough. B. Test for pH level, according to water-repellent manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure chemical bond to silicate minerals. C. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow -over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass if there is the possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces. Cover live plants and grass. D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water-repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect the substrate before application of water repellent and to instruct Applicator on the product and application method to be used. WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - 2 • • • B. Apply a heavy -saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low- pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for using airless spraying procedure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Apply a second saturation spray coating, repeating first application. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for limitations on drying time between coats and after rainstorm wetting of surfaces between coats. Consult manufacturer's technical representative if written instructions are not applicable to Project conditions. 3.3 CLEANING A. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces and surfaces soiled or damaged by water- repellent application as work progresses. Repair damage caused by water-repellent application. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION 071900 WATER REPELLENTS 071900 - 3 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Perimeter insulation under slabs -on -grade. 2. Cooler/ freeze insulation under slabs -on -grade. 3. Perimeter wall insulation (supporting backfill). 4. Concealed building insulation. 5. Vapor retarders. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for insulation installed in masonry cells. 2. Division 07 Section 'Water -Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)" for insulation specified as part of these systems. 3. Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 4. Division 07 Section 'Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing° for insulation specified as part of roofing construction. 5. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for installation in metal -framed assemblies of insulation specified by referencing this Section. 6. Division 21 Section "Fire -Suppression Systems Insulation." 7. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Insulation." 8. Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." 9. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for insulated drainage panels. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock -wool fibers, slag -wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat -cut lengths) or rolls. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Buming Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire -Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1 • B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 FOAM -PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION A. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. 2. Type IV, 1.60 lb/cu. ft., unless otherwise indicated. B. Extruded -Polystyrene Drainage Panels: ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below and fabricated with one side having a matrix of drainage and edge channels. 1. Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. 2. Type IV, 1.60 Ib/cu. ft. C. Extruded -Polystyrene Board Insulation: Cooler/ freezer floor insulation, ASTM C 578, of type and density indicated below, with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively: 1. Manufacturers: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products Division. 2. Type VII, 2.20 Ib/cu. ft. 2.3 GLASS -FIBER BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Owens Corning. B. Unfaced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics, and formaldehyde free. C. Faced, Glass -Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (blankets with reflective membrane facing), Class A (membrane -faced surface with a flame -spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a vapor barrier), faced with foil -scrim -kraft, foil -scrim, or foil -scrim -polyethylene vapor -retarder membrane on 1 face, and formaldehyde free. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2 • • 2.4 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Reinforced -Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 -outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not less than 25 Ib/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm. 1. Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65. B. Fire -Retardant, Reinforced -Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: 2 -outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nonwoven grid of nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not Tess than 22 Ib/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.1317 perm and with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of not more than 5 and 60, respectively. 1. Products: a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 2FR. b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-55 FR. C. Vapor -Retarder Tape: Pressure -sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. D. Vapor -Retarder Fasteners: Pancake -head, self -tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers. E. Single -Component Non -Sag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT related to exposure, and Use 0 related to vapor -barrier -related substrates. 2.5 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. 2.6 INSULATION FASTENERS A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle -Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements: 1. Products: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. c. Gemco; Spindle Type. 2. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon -steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square. 3. Spindle: Copper -coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates. 1. Products: a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment. THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 3 r 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow. C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Water -Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER -SLAB INSULATION A. On vertical surfaces, set insulation units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation from underside of slab on grade to top of concrete footing. B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units. C. Insulation to be placed in accordance per the required min. R -values as determined in the current International Energy Conservation Code. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF COOLER AND FREEZER SLAB INSULATION A. Install insulation below slabs where shown. Apply in multiple layers to minimize thermal bridging. Install joints of each layer staggered a minimum of 12 -inches from the layer below. Install boards next to each other with tight joints not exceeding 1/8 -inch. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between foam -plastic insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Set vapor -retarder -faced units with vapor retarder to warm -in -winter side of construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure airtight installation. 2. Unfaced units to be used as per ASHRAE recommendations for the corresponding hygro-thermal region. D. Install mineral -fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal -framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 4. For wood -framed construction, install mineral -fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows: THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 4 • • a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it. E. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle• -type insulation anchors as follows: 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturers written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation -retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. F. Stuff glass -fiber loose -fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. 3.7 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose -fiber insulation. B. Before installing vapor retarder, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape according to vapor -retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor -retarder tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. C. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor -retarder fasteners as recommended by vapor -retarder manufacturer. D. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with vapor -retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. E. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with vapor -retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder. F. Vapor retarder (type) to be placed in wall assembly in accordance with ASHRAE requirements for the appropriate hygro-thermal region. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 072100 THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 072419 - WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes water -drainage exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS) applied over weather -resistant sheathing paper over sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for sheathing and weather -resistant sheathing paper. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Class PB EIFS: A non -load-bearing, exterior wall Badding system that consists of an insulation board attached adhesively, mechanically, or both to the substrate; an integrally reinforced base coat; and a textured protective finish coat. B. Water -Drainage EIFS: EIFS with a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the exterior. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following: 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. 2. Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into water -drainage EIFS and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal - insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish, and including a means that allows water entering into an EIFS assembly to drain to the exterior. B. Class PB EIFS: Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that comply with the following: 1. Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1 -inch thick EIFS mounted on 1/2 -inch thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A. 2. Absorption -Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01. 3. Accelerated Weathering: Five samples per ICC -ES AC235 showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, delamination, or other characteristics that might affect performance as a wall cladding after testing for 2000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 153 or ASTM G 155. 4. Freeze -Thaw. No surface changes, cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination, or indications of delamination between components when viewed under 5 times magnification after 10 cycles per ICC -ES AC235. 5. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2 -by -2 -inch clean glass substrate, cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274. 6. Salt -Spray Resistance: No deleterious affects when tested according to ICC -ES AC235. 7. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the EIFS, adhesive, base coat, or finish coat when tested per ICC - ES AC235. 8. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1 -inch thick EIFS mounted on 1/2 -inch thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expanded polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. of air pressure WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 1 difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02. 9. Water Resistance: Three samples, each consisting of 1 -inch thick EIFS mounted on 1/2 -inch thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247. 10. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1 -inch thick EIFS when constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following: a. High Impact Resistance: 90 to 150 inch -lbs. 11. Drainage: According to ICC -ES AC235. 12. Structural Performance Testing: EIFS assembly and components shall comply with ICC -ES AC235 when tested per ASTM E 330. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For EIFS. Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work. C. Samples: 24 -inch square panels for each type of finish -coat color and texture indicated, prepared using same tools and techniques intended for actual work including custom trim, each profile, an aesthetic reveal, a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected. 1. Include sealants and exposed accessory Samples to verify color selected. D. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency. E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS and joint sealants comply with requirements. F. Material or Product Certificates: For cementitious materials and aggregates and for each insulation and joint sealant, from manufacturer. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each water -/weather -resistive barrier, insulation, reinforcing mesh, joint sealant, and coating. H. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: For joint sealants from sealant manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. I. Field quality -control reports and special inspection reports. J. Maintenance Data: For EIFS to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. B. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following fire -test - response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Fire -Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119. 2. Radiant Heat Exposure: No ignition of EIFS when tested according to NFPA 268. 3. Potential Heat: Acceptable level when tested according to NFPA 259. WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 2 4. Surface-Buming Characteristics: Provide insulation board, adhesives, base coats, and finish coats with flame -spread index of 25 or less and smoke -developed index of 450 or less, per ASTM E 84. D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact and clearly identifying products. B. Store materials inside and under cover, keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. 2. Protect plastic insulation against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air, humidity, and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of EIFS with related Work specified in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including sheathing, weather -resistant sheathing paper, flashing, trim, joint sealants, windows, and doors, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, moisture, and other causes. Do not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and drainage plane that is behind water -drainage EIFS. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc. 2. Finestone; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 3. Senergy; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 4. SonoWall; Degussa Wall Systems, Inc. 5. Sto Corp. 6. TEC; an H. B. Fuller company. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide water -resistive coating, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish -coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and with substrates and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for Project. B. Water -Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water/weather-resistive barriers, compatible with substrate, and complying with physical and performance criteria of ICC -ES AC212. 1. Sheathing Joint Tape: Type recommended by EIFS manufacturer for sealing joints between and penetrations through sheathing. 2. VOC Content of Coatings Used as Insulation Adhesive: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 3 C. Primer/Sealer. EIFS manufacturer's standard substrate conditioner with VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), designed to seal substrates from moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate of type indicated and adhesive used for application of insulation. D. Flexible -Membrane Flashing: Cold -applied, fully self -adhering, self -healing, rubberized -asphalt and polyethylene -film composite sheet or tape and primer, EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer. E. Drainage Mat: Three-dimensional, non -woven, entangled filament, nylon or plastic mat designed to drain incidental moisture by gravity; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer with manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant mechanical fasteners suitable for intended substrate. F. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use; compatible with substrate; with VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Molded, Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Board Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 578, Type I; EIFS manufacturer's requirements; and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for most stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following: 1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results. 2. Flame -Spread and Smoke -Developed Indexes: 25 and 450 or less, respectively, per ASTM E 84. 3. Dimensions: Provide insulation boards not more than 24 by 48 inches and in the thickness indicated, but not more than 4 inches thick or less than thickness allowed by ASTM C 1397. 4. Channeled Board Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard factory -fabricated profile with linear, vertical drainage channels, slots, or waves on the back side of board. H. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali -resistant, open -weave, glass -fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multi -end strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not Tess than 120 Ibf/in. per EIMA 105.01; complying with ASTM D 578 and the following: 1. High -Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 15 oz/sq. yd. 2. Strip Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 3.75 oz/sq. yd. 3. Detail Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz/sq. yd. 4. Comer Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 7.2 oz/sq. yd. Base -Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the following requirements: 1. Job -mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color, and manufacturer's standard polymer -emulsion adhesive designed for use with portland cement. 2. Job -combined formulation of manufacturer's standard polymer -emulsion adhesive and manufacturer's standard dry mix containing portland cement. 3. Factory -blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert fillers to which only water is added at Project site. 4. Factory -mixed non-cementitious formulation of polymer -emulsion adhesive and inert fillers that is ready to use without adding other materials. J. Primer. EIFS manufacturer's standard factory -mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base -coat surface for application of finish coat. K. Finish -Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic -based coating with enhanced mildew resistance complying with the following: 1. Factory -mixed formulation of polymer -emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. a. Aggregate: Marble chips of size and color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Sealer. Manufacturer's waterproof, clear acrylic -based sealer for protecting finish coat. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. L. Water. Potable. WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 4 M. Mechanical Fasteners: EIFS manufacturers standard corrosion -resistant fasteners consisting of thermal cap, standard washer and shaft attachments, and fastener indicated below; selected for properties of pullout, tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of application indicated; capable of pulling fastener head below surface of insulation board; and of the following description: 1. For attachment to steel studs from 0.033 to 0.112 inch in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954. 2. For attachment to light -gage steel framing members not less than 0.0179 inch in thickness, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002. 3. For attachment to wood framing members and plywood sheathing, provide steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002, Type W. 4. For attachment, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners suitable for substrate. N. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturers written instructions; manufactured from UV -stabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturers standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063. 1. Casing Bead: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg. 2. Drip Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with face leg extended to form a drip, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg. 3. Weep Screed/Track: Prefabricated, one-piece type for attachment behind insulation with perforated face leg extended to form a drip and weep holes in track bottom, of depth required to suit thickness of coating and insulation, with face leg perforated for bonding to coating and back leg; designed to drain incidental moisture that gets into wall construction to the exterior at terminations of EIFS with drainage. 4. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated, one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of movement. 5. Window Sill Flashing: Prefabricated type for both flashing and sloping sill over framing beneath windows; with end and back dams; designed to direct water to exterior. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Products: Provide EIFS manufacturer's listed and recommended chemically curing, elastomeric sealant that is compatible with joint fillers, joint substrates, and other related materials, and complies with requirements for products and testing indicated in ASTM C 1481 and with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for products corresponding to description indicated below: 1. Multi-component, non -sag urethane sealant. 2. Provide sealants, for use inside the weatherproofing system, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Preformed Foam Sealant Products: Provide sealant compatible with adjacent materials and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." C. Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 MIXING A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in dean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. B. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Begin coating application only after surfaces are dry. 2. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 5 • • 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work. B. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind drainage plane of EIFS and deterioration of substrates. C. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation. 3.3 EIFS INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with EIFS manufacturers written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. 3.4 SUBSTRATE PROTECTION APPLICATION A. Primer/Sealer. Apply over plywood substrates to protect substrates from degradation and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate. B. Water -Resistive Coatings: Apply over substrates to protect substrates from degradation and to provide water -/weather -resistive barrier. 1. Tape and seal joints, exposed edges, terminations, and inside and outside corners of sheathing unless otherwise indicated by EIFS manufacturers written instructions. C. Flexible -Membrane Flashing: Install over weather -resistive barrier, applied and lapped to shed water, seal at openings, penetrations, terminations, and where indicated by EIFS manufacturer's written instructions to protect wall assembly from degradation. Prime substrates, if required, and install flashing to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written instructions and details. 3.5 TRIM INSTALLATION A. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at window sills, and elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of insulation. 1. Weep Screed/Track: Use at bottom termination edges, at window and door heads of water -drainage EIFS unless otherwise indicated. 2. Window Sill Flashing: Use at windows unless otherwise indicated. 3. Expansion Joint: Use where indicated on Drawings. 4. Casing Bead: Use at other locations. 3.6 DRAINAGE MAT INSTALLATION A. Drainage Mat: Apply wrinkle free, continuously, with edges overlapped mechanically secured with fasteners over water -/weather -resistive barrier according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Board Insulation: Adhesively and mechanically attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written instructions, and the following: 1. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface. 2. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before installing mechanical fasteners, beginning rasping and sanding insulation, or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh. 3. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with EIFS manufacturers written instructions. Install top surface of fastener heads flush with plane of insulation. Install fasteners into or through substrates with the following minimum penetration: a. Steel Framing: 5/16 inch. b. Wood Framing: 1 inch. 4. Apply insulation over drainage mat and dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally. 5. Begin first course of insulation from screed/tradc and work upward. Work from perimeter casing beads toward interior of panels if possible. WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 6 6. Place insulation with adhesive strips and channels, slots, or waves aligned in the vertical position for drainage. Align drainage channels, slots, or waves with channels, slots, or waves in insulation boards above and below. 7. Interlock ends at intemal and external comers. 8. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. 9. Cut insulation to fit openings, comers, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated. 10. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. 11. Cut aesthetic reveals in outside face of insulation with high-speed router and bit configured to produce grooves, rabbets, and other features that comply with profiles and locations indicated. Do not reduce insulation thickness at aesthetic reveals to less than 3/4 inch. 12. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. 13. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. 14. After installing insulation and before applying field -applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 15. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: a. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. b. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh. c. At edges trimmed by accessories, extend base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat over face leg of accessories. 16. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing and water -/weather -resistive barrier. B. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows: 1. At expansion joints in substrates behind EIFS. 2. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction, including other EIFS. 3. Where wall height or building shape changes. 4. Where EIFS manufacturer requires joints in long continuous elevations. 3.8 BASE -COAT INSTALLATION A. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16 -inch dry -coat thickness. B. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed type indicated below in wet base coat to produce wrinkle -free installation with mesh continuous at comers and overlapped not Tess than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of comers. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base -coat material if necessary, so reinforcing -mesh color and pattern are not visible. C. Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9 -by -12 -inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at comers of openings (re-entrant comers). Apply 8 -inch wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside comers unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of comers. 1. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide. 2. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh. D. Double Base -Coat Application: Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. 3.9 FINISH -COAT INSTALLATION A. Primer. Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 7 B. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. 1. Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Sealer Coat: Apply over dry finish coat, in number of coats and thickness required by EIFS manufacturer. 3.10 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" and in ASTM C 1481. 1. Apply joint sealants after base coat has cured but before applying finish coat. 2. Clean surfaces to receive sealants to comply with indicated requirements and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Apply primer recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. 4. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. 5. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal. 6. Recess sealant sufficiently from surface of EIFS so an additional sealant application, including cylindrical sealant backing, can be installed without protruding beyond EIFS surface. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 1. According to ICC -ES AC235. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. C. EIFS Tests and Inspections: For the following: 1. According to ICC -ES AC235. D. Remove and replace EIFS where test results indicate that EIFS do not comply with specified requirements. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. END OF SECTION 072419 WATER -DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) 072419 - 8 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 072719 - WEATHER BARRIERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Weather barrier membrane (DuPonV" Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D) B. Seam Tape (DuPontTM Tyvek® Tape) C. Flashing (DuPont."' FlexWrapTM', DuPontTM' StraightFlashTM', and DuPont1 Thru-Wall Flashing) D. Fasteners 1.2 REFERENCES A. ASTM Intemational 1. ASTM C 920; Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2. ASTM C 1193; Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants 3. ASTM D 882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 4. ASTM D 1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non -woven Fabrics 5. ASTM E 84; Test Method for Surface Buming Characteristics of Building Materials 6. ASTM E 96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 7. ASTM E 1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building Walls 8. ASTM E 2178; Test Method for Air Pemieance of Building Materials B. AATCC — American Association of Textile Chemists & Colorists Test Method 127 Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test C. TAPPI 1. Test Method T-410; Grams of Paper and Paperboard (Weight per Unit Area) 2. Test Method T-460; Air Resistance of Paper (Gurley Hill Method) 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer current technical literature for each component. B. Samples: Weather Barrier Membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch. C. Quality Assurance Submittals 1. Design Data, Test Reports: Provide manufacturer test reports indicating product compliance with indicated requirements. 2. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Weather Barriers 072719 - 1 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual A. Qualifications 1. Installer shall have experience with installation of DuPont TM Tyvek® weather barrier assemblies under similar conditions. 2. Installation shall be in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's installation guidelines and recommendations. 3. Source Limitations: Provide weather barrier and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver weather barrier materials and components in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. B. Store weather barrier materials as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULING A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather -tight barrier assembly. B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation. 2.2 MANUFACTURER A. DuPont; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 721, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1.800.44TYVEK (8- 9835); http://construction.twek.com 2.3 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: High-performance, flash spun -bonded olefin, non -woven, non -perforated, secondary weather barrier is based upon DuPont"' Tyvek® CommercialWrap® D and related assembly components. B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: 0.003 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. Type I per ASTM E 1677. 2. Water Vapor Transmission: 40 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96, Method B. 3. Water Penetration Resistance: 225 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127. 4. Basis Weight: 2.4 ozlyd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Infiltration Resistance: Air infiltration at 700 seconds, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: 35/42 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D 822 , Method A. 7. Surface Buming Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 . Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 25. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Seam Tape: DuPont."" Tyvek® Tape as manufactured by DuPont. Weather Barriers 072719 - 2 • 0 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual B. Fasteners: 1. Steel Frame Construction Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws, as manufactured by DuPont: 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2 -inch diameter plastic cap fasteners. AND/OR 2. Wood Frame Construction Tyvek® Wrap Caps, as manufactured by DuPont: #4 nails with large 1 - inch plastic cap fasteners; 1 -inch minimum plastic cap staple with a 7/8" minimum staple length. AND/OR 3. Masonry Construction, Masonry tap -con fasteners with Tyvek® Wrap Caps as manufactured by DuPont: 2 -inch diameter plastic cap fasteners. C. Sealants 1. Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. 2. Products: a. Tremco 830 b. Tremco Butyl c. Sealants recommended by the weather barrier manufacturer. D. Adhesives: 1. Provide adhesive recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. 2. Products: a. Liquid Nails® LN -109 b. Polyglaze® SM 5700 c. Denso Butyl Liquid d. 3M High Strength 90 e. SIA 655 — meets Califomia VOC requirements f. Adhesives recommend by the weather barrier manufacturer. E. Primers: 1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing. 2. Products: a. 3M High Strength 90 b. Denso Butyl Spray c. SIA 655 — meets Califomia VOC requirements d. Permagrip 105 e. Primers recommended by the flashing manufacturer F. Flashing 1. DuPontn" FlexWrapTm, as manufactured by DuPont: Flexible membrane flashing materials for window openings and penetrations. 2. DuPontIN StraightFlashTm, as manufactured by DuPont: Straight flashing membrane materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc. AND/OR 3. DuPontim Thru-Wall Surface Adhered Membrane with Integrated Drip Edge, as manufactured by DuPont: Thru-Wall flashing membrane materials for flashing at changes in direction or elevation (shelf angles, foundations, etc.) and at transitions between different assembly materials. AND/OR Weather Barriers 072719 - 3 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual 4. Preformed Inside and Outside Comers and End Dams as manufactured by DuPont: Preformed three-dimensional shapes to complete the flashing system used in conjunction with DuPontTM Thru- Wall Flashing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of weather barrier and accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION - WEATHER BARRIER A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations B. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. C. Start weather barrier installation at a building comer, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond corner to overlap. D. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. F. Window and Door Openings: Extend weather barrier completely over openings. G. Overlap weather barrier 1. Exterior comers: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches. H. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Steel or Wood Frame Construction: Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommend fasteners, space 6 •-18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally. AND/OR 2. Masonry Construction: Attach weather barrier to masonry. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommend fasteners, space 6-18 inches vertically on center and 24 inches maximum horizontally. Weather barrier may be temporarily attached to masonry using recommended adhesive, placed in vertical strips spaced 24 inches on center, when coordinated on the project site. I. Apply 4 inch by 7 inch piece of DuPont TM StraightFlashTM to weather barrier membrane prior to the installation Badding anchors. 3.3 SEAMING A. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. Weather Barriers 072719 - 4 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual 3.4 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with non -flanged windows — all cladding types) A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45 -degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.5 FLASHING (for use with non -flanged windows — all cladding types) A. Cut [7 -inch] [9 -inch] wide DuPontTM FlexWrapTM' a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPontTM FlexWrapTM' edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into comers by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan DuPontTM FlexWrap'"" at bottom comers onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. Apply 9 -inch wide strips of DuPont."' StraightFlashTM at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start StraightFlashTM' at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill. E. Spray -apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. F. Install DuPontTM FlexWrapTM at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches. G. Coordinate flashing with window installation. H. On exterior, install backer -rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. I. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4 -inch wide DuPont."' StraightFlashTM over the 45 -degree seams. J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. 3.6 THRU-WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Apply primer per manufacturer's written instructions B. Install preformed comers and end dams seeded in sealant in appropriate locations along wall. C. Starting at a comer, remove release sheet and apply membrane to primed surfaces in lengths of 8 to 10 feet. D. Extend membrane through wall and leave 1/4 inch minimum exposed to form drip edge. E. Roll flashing into place. Ensure continuous and direct contact with substrate. F. Lap ends and overlap preformed comers 4 inches minimum. Seal all laps with sealant. Weather Barriers 072719 - 5 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual G. Trim exterior edge of membrane 1 -inch and secure metal drip edge per manufacturer's written instructions. H. Terminate membrane on vertical wall. (Terminate into reglet, counterflashing or with termination bar.) I. Apply sealant bead at each termination. 3.7 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT BASE OF WALL A. Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6 -inches. B. Mechanically fasten bottom of weather barrier through top of thru-wall flashing. C. Seal vertical and horizontal seams with tape or sealing membrane. 3.8 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT SHELF ANGLE A. Seal weather barrier to bottom of shelf angle with sealing membrane. B. Apply thru-wall flashing to top of shelf angle. Overlap thru-wall flashing with weather barrier by 6 -inches. C. Seal bottom of weather barrier to thru-wall flashing with tape or sealing membrane. 3.9 THRU-WALL FLASHING / WEATHER BARRIER INTERFACE AT WINDOW HEAD A. Cut flap in weather barrier at window head. B. Prime exposed sheathing. C. Install end dams bedded in sealant. D. Adhere 2 inches minimum thru-wall flashing to wall sheathing. Overlap lintel with thru-wall flashing and extend % inch minimum beyond outside edge of lintel to form drip edge. E. Apply sealant along thru-wall flashing edges. F. Fold weather barrier flap back into place and tape bottom edge to thru-wall flashing. Tape diagonal cuts of weather barrier. G. Secure weather barrier flap with fasteners. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage. END OF SECTION Weather Barriers 072719 - 6 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 074113 - MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section "Steel Decking" for steel roof deck supporting metal roof panels. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for field -formed fascia, flashings, roof drainage systems, and other sheet metal work not part of metal roof panel assemblies. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for field -applied sealants not otherwise specified in this Section. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Manufactured roof panel assemblies shall comply with performance requirements indicated and be capable of withstanding structural movement, thermal induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. There shall be no failures due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. B. Air Infiltration: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies with permanent resistance to air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at a static air pressure difference of 4.01.57 lbf/sq. ft. C. Water Penetration: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies with no water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at a minimal differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting, wind load design pressure of not less than 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. and not more than 12.0 Ibf/sq. ft. D. Hydrostatic -Head Resistance: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 2140. E. Wind -Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for Class 90 wind - uplift -resistance, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. F. Structural Performance: Provide manufactured roof panel assemblies capable of safely supporting design loads indicated under in-service conditions withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following Toads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Snow Loads: Per local code requirements 2. Deflection Limits: Metal roof panel assemblies shall withstand wind and snow loads with maximum vertical deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span for the total load and 1/240 of the span for live load. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime - sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. H. Thermal Performance: Provide insulated metal roof panel assemblies with thermal -resistance value (R - value) indicated when tested according to ASTM C 518. I. Solar Reflectance: Initial solar reflectance of not less than 0.25 when tested according to ASTM E 903, and maintained, under normal conditions, solar reflectance not less than 0.15 for 3 years after installation. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 -1 • • 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of roof panel and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal roof panels; details of edge conditions, side -seam and endlap joints, panel profiles, comers, anchorages, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field -assembled work. 1. Accessories: Indude details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches: a. Flashing and trim b. Snow guards C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below: 1. Manufactured Roof Panels: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, clips, closures, and other metal roof panel accessories. 2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Indude fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories: 12 -inch- long Samples for each type of accessory. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. F. Maintenance Data: For metal roof panels to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed manufactured roof panel assembly projects similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for the Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A Professional Engineer who is legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the manufactured roof panel assembly system and performance criteria indicated. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of manufactured roof panels from single source from single manufacturer. E. Surface-Buming Characteristics: Provide metal roof panels having insulation core material with the following surface-buming characteristics as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. F. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide metal roof panels identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets, metal roof panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. Package metal roof panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Unload, store, and erect metal roof panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 - 2 • • C. Stack metal roof panels on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weather -tight and ventilated covering. Store metal roof panels to ensure dryness. Do not store metal roof panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. D. Protect strippable protective covering on metal roof panels from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for period of metal roof panel installation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit metal roof panel work to be performed according to manufacturers written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with metal roof panels by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate metal roof panels with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of metal decks, sheathing, and other adjoining work to provide a leak -proof, secure, and non -corrosive installation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal roof panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Weather -tightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weather -tight, including leaks, within specified warranty period. 1. Weather -tight Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Liability Limit: Original cost of manufactured roof assembly materials plus installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering manufactured roof panels that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. AEP -Span 2. Berridge Manufacturing Company 3. Petersen Aluminum Corporation 4. Englert, Incorporation 5. McElroy Metal 2.2 PANEL MATERIALS A. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Galvalume Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, structural quality. 2. Thickness: 24 -gauge, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 3. Surface: Smooth, flat finish. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 - 3 • • • 4. Exposed Coil -Coated Finish: a. 2 -Coat Fluoropolymer. AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat, total minimum dry film thickness of 0.9 mils and a 30 percent reflective gloss when tested in accordance with ASTM D 523. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1) Durability: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions for a minimum of 20 -years for film integrity and 10 -years without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to ASTM D 4214; and without fading in excess of 5 Hunter units. b. Color. Valspar Fluoropon Yellow No. 433-B-665 (limited per manufacturer), unless otherwise noted on Drawings or required by Owner. 5. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil. 2.3 ROOF PANEL ASSEMBLIES A. Standing Seam Roof Panels: Manufacturers standard factory -formed, standing -seam roof panel assembly designed for concealed mechanical attachment of roof purlins or deck. 1. Panels shall be 16 -inches on center with a minimum seam height of 2 -inches. Panels shall be vertical leg mechanically seamed panels capable of being installed in a radius application. 2. Clips: Provide stainless-steel panel clips as supplied by metal roof panel manufacturer, design to meet negative -load requirements. 3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250 -inch thick, stainless-steel or nylon coated aluminum sheets. 2.4 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Felts: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt -saturated organic felts. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and accessories required for a complete roof panel assembly and as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. B. Panel Fasteners: Self -tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end -welded studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory -applied coating. Provide EPDM, PVC, or neoprene sealing washers. 1. Use stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized steel fasteners for interior applications. 2. Provide exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal roof panels by means of plastic caps or factory applied coating. 3. Provide metal backed neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal roof panels. 4. Locate and space exposed fasteners in the true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of neoprene washer. C. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material as roof panels, prepainted with coil coating, minimum 0.018 inch thick. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, comers, bases, framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal roof panels D. Closure Strips: Closed -cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or cross-linked, polyolefin -foam or closed -cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1 -inch -thick, flexible closure strips; cut or pre -molded to match metal roof panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weather -tight construction. E. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. F. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non -sag, nontoxic, non -staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 - 4 • G. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal roof panels and remain weather -tight; and as recommended in writing by metal roof panel manufacturer. H. Butyl -Rubber -Based, Solvent -Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. I. Expansion Joint Sealant: For hook -type expansion joints that must be free to move, provide non -setting, non -hardening, non -migrating, heavy bodied polyisobutylene sealant. J. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type non -corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. K. Primer. Rust -inhibitive primer recommended by panel manufacturer for compatibility with finish coat. L. Snow Guards: Prefabricated, non -corrosive units designed to be installed without penetrating metal roof panels, and complete with predrilled holes, damps, or hooks for anchoring. 1. Surface -Mounted, Metal, Stop -Type Snow Guards: Cast -aluminum stops designed for attachment to pan surface of metal roof panel using construction adhesive, silicone or polyurethane sealant, or adhesive tape. 2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate and finish metal roof panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes and as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements. B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. C. Fabricate metal roof panel side laps with factory -installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a tight seal and prevent metal -to -metal contact, in a manner that will seal weathertight and minimize noise from movements within panel assembly. D. Panels shall be radius at the jobsite with curving (bending) equipment owned and operated by the metal roofing manufacturer. E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated. 1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 2. End Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. 3. Sealed Joints: Form non -expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view. 5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of size and metal thickness recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or by metal roof panel manufacturer for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. 2.7 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 - 5 • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, metal roof panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine primary and secondary roof framing to verify that rafters, purlins, angles, channels, and other structural panel support members and anchorages have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. C. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. D. Examine roughing -in for components and systems penetrating metal roof panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal roof panels before metal roof panel installation. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate metal panel roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of decks and other adjoining work to provide a weather -tight, secure, and non -corrosive installation. B. Promptly remove protective film from exposed surfaces of metal roof panels. Strip protective coatings with care to avoid damage to finish surfaces. C. Miscellaneous Framing: Install miscellaneous roof panel support members and anchorage according to metal roof panel manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Felt Underlayment: Apply at locations indicated on Drawings, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches. 1. Apply over entire roof surface. B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.4 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with roof panel manufacturers written instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable to project conditions and supporting substrates. Anchor roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. 1. Field cutting metal roof panels by torch is strictly prohibited. 2. Install metal roof panels with concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Install metal roof panels with exposed exterior and interior fasteners, where required, with pre - finished fastener heads to match metal roof panel finish. 4. Install panels over solid substrate within minimum 3:12 roof slope. Install single -ply roof felts from lower edge in shingling affect up, with a minimum 6 -inch side laps and 6 -inch end laps. 5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. 6. Provide metal closures at rake edges and rake walls. 7. Flash and seal metal roof panels with weather closures at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all openings. 8. End Splices: Locate panel end splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel end splices to avoid a four -panel splice condition. 9. Install metal flashing to allow moisture to run over and off metal roof panels. B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at one and only one location for each panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels for fasteners. 1. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal movement. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 - 6 • • C. Accessories: Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, fascia, clips, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gutters, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying rubberized -asphalt underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Coat back side of roof panels with bituminous coating where roof panels will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. E. Install felt underlayment and building -paper slip sheet on roof deck under metal panels, unless otherwise recommended by roof panel manufacturer. Use adhesive for temporary anchorage, where possible, to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under metal roof panels. Apply from eave to ridge in shingle fashion and lap material minimum of 6 -inches. F. Fasteners: Use stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior and galvanized -steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. G. Anchor Clips: Anchor metal roof panels and other components of the Work securely in place, using manufacturer's approved fasteners according to manufacturers' written instructions. H. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for weatherproof performance of metal roof panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 1. Seal metal roof panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel. Seal side joints where recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.5 METAL ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. Standing -Seam Metal Roof Panels: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing -seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. 1. Install clips to supports with self -tapping fasteners. 2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Snap Joint: Nest standing seams and fasten together by interlocking and completely engaging factory -applied sealant. 4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer -approved, motorized seamer tool so clip, metal roof panel, and factory -applied sealant are completely engaged. 3.6 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1. Install components required for a complete metal roof panel assembly including trim, copings, ridge closures, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. B. Hashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather -resistant performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and metal roof panels. Fasten and seal to metal roof panels as recommended by manufacturer. MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 - 7 • • • 3.7 SNOW GUARD INSTALLATION A. Stop -Type Snow Guards: Attach snow guards to metal roof panels with adhesive, sealant, or adhesive tape, as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate metal roof panels. 1. Provide 2 rows of snow guards, at locations indicated on Drawings, spaced 15 -inches apart, beginning 15 -inches up from gutter, with each snow guard centered between panel ribs. 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal roof panel units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect metal roof panel installation, including accessories. Report results in writing. B. Remove and replace applications of metal roof panels where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. C. Additional inspections, at Contractors expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal roof panels are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal roof panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal roof panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. B. Replace metal roof panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 074113 MANUFACTURED ROOF PANELS 074113 - 8 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 075400 - THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Mechanically fastened membrane roofing system. 2. Roof insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 4. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for roof drains. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience. C. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a membrane roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. Fire/VVindstorm Classification: Class 1A- 90. 2. Hail Resistance: MH 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system, include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. Base flashings and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation, including slopes. 3. Insulation fastening patterns. C. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 -1 • D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. F. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. H. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has FMG approval for membrane roofing system identical to that used for this Project. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. D. Source Limitations: Obtain components for membrane roofing system approved by roofing membrane manufacturer. E. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide membrane roofing materials with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Exterior Fire -Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. 2. Fire -Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119, for fire -resistance -rated roof assemblies of which roofing system is a part. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to roofing system including, but not limited to, the following: 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components. B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. 1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 - 2 • • 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. Special warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, roof pavers, walkway products, and other components of membrane roofing system. 2. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Fabric -Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from a thermoplastic polyolefin, intemally fabric or scrim reinforced, and as follows: 1. Manufacturers: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated; Sure -Weld TPO Roofing System. b. Johns Manville International, Inc.; Ultrgard SRT 60. 2. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: White. 4. Physical Properties: a. Breaking Strength: 225 Ibf; ASTM D 751, grab method. b. Elongation at Break: 15 percent; ASTM D 751. c. Tearing Strength: 55 Ibf minimum; ASTM D 751, Procedure B. d. Brittleness Point: Minus 22 deg F. e. Ozone Resistance: No cracks after sample, wrapped around a 3 -inch diameter mandrel, is exposed for 166 hours to a temperature of 104 deg F and an ozone level of 100 pphm; ASTM D 1149. f. Resistance to Heat Aging: 90 percent minimum retention of breaking strength, elongation at break, and tearing strength after 166 hours at 240 deg F; ASTM D 573. g. Water Absorption: Less than 4 percent mass change after 166 hours' immersion at 158 deg F; ASTM D 471. h. Linear Dimension Change: Plus or minus 2 percent; ASTM D 1204. 2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. 1. Liquid -type auxiliary materials shall meet VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet membrane. C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard solvent -based bonding adhesive for membrane, and solvent - based bonding adhesive for base flashings. D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for application. E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors. F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard aluminum -zinc -alloy -coated or zinc -coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 - 3 • G. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside comer sheet flashings, T -joint covers, termination reglets, cover strips, and other accessories. 2.4 ROOF INSULATION A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with requirements and referenced standards, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of thicknesses indicated. B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, felt or glass -fiber mat facer on both major surfaces. 1. Manufacturers: a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Johns Manville International, Inc. C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory -tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 3/8 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated. E. Provide required thickness or layers of insulation board to meet the required min. R -value as indicated in the Construction Documents. (See Roof System on sheet A1.3). F. Base layer of insulation to have integral thermal barrier or a approved manufacturer's thermal barrier base sheet. 2.5 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing. B. Fasteners: Factory -coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion -resistance provisions in FMG 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. C. Cold Fluid -Applied Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard cold fluid -applied adhesive formulated to adhere roof insulation to substrate. D. Cover Board: ASTM C 1177, glass -mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch thick. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Dens -Deck" by Georgia-Pacific Corporation, or equal. 2.6 WALKWAYS A. Flexible Walkways: Factory -formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid -rubber, slip -resisting, surface -textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. 2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 - 4 • 3. Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck comply with requirements in Division 05 Section "Steel Decking." 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.. B. Prevent materials from entering and dogging roof drains and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof -drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing. 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday. B. Comply with membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation. C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated. D. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2 inches or greater, install 2 or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water. F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation. 1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations. G. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board - type roof insulation to deck type. 1. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. 2. Install subsequent layers of insulation in a cold fluid -applied adhesive. H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Stagger joints from joints in insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and fasten to roof deck. 1. Fasten to resist uplift pressure at comers, perimeter, and field of roof. 3.4 MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install roofing membrane over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing membrane and allow membrane to relax before installing. 1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082. B. Start installation of roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel. C. Accurately align roofing membranes and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps. D. Mechanically or adhesively fasten roofing membrane securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing. E. Apply roofing membrane with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 - 5 • F. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing membrane, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing membrane according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation. 1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of roofing membrane. 2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing membrane that does not meet requirements. G. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely seal roofing membrane in place with clamping ring. H. In -Splice Attachment: Secure one edge of roofing membrane using fastening plates centered within membrane splice and mechanically fasten roofing membrane to roof deck. Field -splice seam. 3.5 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply solvent -based bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive to seam area of flashing. C. Flash penetrations and field -formed inside and outside corners with sheet flashing. D. Clean seam areas and overlap and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation. E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings. 3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports. B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.8 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400-6 • • END OF SECTION 075400 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING 075400 - 7 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed low -slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed overhead -piping safety pans. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Panels" for formed sheet metal flashing and trim integral with manufactured roof panels. 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set -on -type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing and copings capable of resisting the following forces according to recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49: 1. Wind Zone 1: For velocity pressures of 21 to 30 lbf/sq. ft.: 60-Ibf/sq. ft. perimeter uplift force, 90- lbf/sq. ft. comer uplift force, and 30-Ibf/sq. ft. outward force. 2. Wind Zone 2: For velocity pressures of 31 to 45 Ibf/sq. ft.: 90-Ibf/sq. ft. perimeter uplift force, 120- lbf/sq. ft. comer uplift force, and 45-Ibf/sq. ft. outward force. 3. Wind Zone 3: For velocity pressures of 46 to 104 Ibf/sq. ft.: 208-Ibf/sq. ft. perimeter uplift force, 312- lbf/sq. ft. comer uplift force, and 104-lbf/sq. ft. outward force. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop and field -assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattem of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, crickets and counterflashings as applicable. 6. Details of special conditions. 7. Details of connections to adjoining work. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1 • 8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other attachments. 2. Trim, Metal Closures, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous Fabrications: 12 inches long and in required profile. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample. D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, and roof -mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and fumish copy of record to each participant. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory -applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2 • B. Zinc -Tin Alloy -Coated Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, dead -soft, fully annealed stainless- steel sheet of minimum uncoated thickness indicated; coated on both sides with a zinc -tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory -applied gray pre -weathering. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot -dip process and prepainted by the coil -coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth, flat. 3. Exposed Coil -Coated Finish: a. Two -Coat Fluoropolymer. AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not Tess than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 4. Color. Match manufactured roof panels, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or Tight -colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mils. 2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self -Adhering, High -Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip -resisting polyethylene -film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS -modified asphalt adhesive, with release - paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low -Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Metal -Fab Manufacturing, LLC; MetShield. e. Owens Coming; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underiayment. B. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-Ib/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self -tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self -drilling screws, gasketed, with hex -washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory - applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter, with spike with ferrule matching intemal gutter width. 2. Fasteners for Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet Hot -dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. C. Sealant Tape: Pressure -sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release -paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non -sag, nontoxic, non -staining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick. D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3 • • F. Epoxy Seam Sealer. Two-part, non -corrosive, aluminum seam -cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. H. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Sealed Joints: Form non -expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints. E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, non-con-osive metal. Cleats and attachment device sizes shall be as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. F. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat -lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.5 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Built-in Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, with riveted and soldered joints, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other special accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch long sections. Fabricate expansion joints and accessories from same metal as gutters unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fabricate gutters with built-in expansion joints. 2. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer. 3. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Zinc -Tin Alloy -Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch thick. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Fumish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: 0.02i7 -thick. C. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Fabricate from the following materials a. Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: 0.02i7 -thick. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4 • 2.6 LOW -SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Roof -Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch long, but not exceeding 10 -foot long, sections. Fumish with 6 -inch wide, joint cover plates. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12 -inch wide, concealed backup plate. a. Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: 0.02i7 -thick. B. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96 -inch long, but not exceeding 10 -foot long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and drill elongated holes for fasteners on interior leg. Miter comers, seal, and solder or weld watertight. 1. Joint Style: Butt, with 12 -inch wide, concealed backup plate. a. Prepainted, Metallic -Coated Steel: 0.0396 -thick. C. Base Flashing: 1. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0276 inch thick. D. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers : 1. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. E. Roof -Penetration Flashing: 1. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Lead: 4.0 Ib/sq. ft., hard tempered. F. Roof -Drain Flashing: 1. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Lead: 4.0 Ib/sq. ft., hard tempered. 2.7 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2 -inch high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.0217 inch thick. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Overhead -Piping Safety Pans: 1. Fabricate from the following materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.040 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings. B. Self -Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self -adhering sheet underiayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5 Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not Tess than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of comer or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws and metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant -filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant - type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre -tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre -tinning where pre -tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Pre -tinning is not required for zinc -tin alloy -coated stainless steel. 3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless -Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. G. Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where indicated and where necessary for strength. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6 • • 3.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Built-in Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Slope to downspouts. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. 1. Install felt underlayment layer in built-in gutter trough and extend to drip edge at eaves and under felt underlayment on roof sheathing. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches. Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches. Fasten with roofing nails. Install slip sheet over felt underlayment. 2. Anchor and loosely lock back edge of gutter to continuous cleat. 3. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24 inches apart. C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1 -1/2 -inch telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c. in between. 2. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct to roof drains. D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low -slope roofs. Set in asphalt roofing cement compatible with roofing membrane. 3.5 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3 -inch centers. C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. 1. Interlock exterior bottom edge of coping with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 24 -inch centers. 2. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24 -inch centers. D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with dose -fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten. E. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of interlocking folded seam or blind rivets and sealant. F. Roof -Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof -penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof. 3.6 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall -opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers. B. Through -Wall Flashing: Installation of through -wall flashing is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry." C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7 • • • 3.7 MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Overhead -Piping Safety Pans: Suspend pans independent from structure above as indicated on Drawings. Pipe and install drain line to plumbing waste or drainage system. 3.8 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8 -inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.9 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder. B. Clean off excess sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Roof curbs. 2. Equipment supports. 3. Roof hatches. 4. Roof supports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal vertical ladders for access to roof hatches. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for roof sheathing, wood cants, and wood nailers. 3. Division 07 low -slope roofing Sections for roofing accessories. 4. Division 07 Section "Metal Roof Panels" for preformed metal roofing and snow guards. 5. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal flashing and counterflashing and miscellaneous sheet metal trim and accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed factory -applied finish required and for each type of roof accessory indicated, prepared on Samples of size to adequately show color. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack, handle, and ship roof accessories properly labeled in heavy-duty packaging to prevent damage. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leak -proof, weather -tight, secure, and non -corrosive installation. 1. With Architects approval, adjust location of roof accessories that would interrupt roof drainage routes. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1 • • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 METAL MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet ASTM A 653, G90 coated and mill phosphatized for field painting. B. Aluminum Extrusions and Tubes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use, mill finished. C. Galvanized Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube, hot -dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123. D. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53. 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Cellulosic -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 208, Type II, Grade 1, 1 inch thick. B. Glass -Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, 1 inch thick. C. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterbome preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. D. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type non -corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. E. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other non -corrosive metal as recommended by roof accessory manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide non -removable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. F. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. G. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, polyurethane sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. H. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single -component, solvent -release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked -type expansion joints with limited movement. I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, non -asbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system. 2.4 ROOF CURBS A. Roof Curbs: Provide metal roof curbs, intemally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction to be supported on roof curbs. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, with stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. 2. Liner. Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish. 3. Factory install wood nailers at tops of curbs. 4. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 5. Factory insulate curbs with 1 -1/2 -inch thick, glass -fiber board insulation. 6. Curb height may be determined by adding thickness of roof insulation and minimum base flashing height recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 2 • 7. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. B. Prefabricated Roof Curbs: 1. CRC -3; Custom Curb, Inc. 2. PC -2; Pate Company. 3. RC -2A; Roof Products & Systems Corporation. 4. TC -3; ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. C. Pipe and Conduit Penetration Cover Assemblies: Size and quantities of pipes or conduits as shown on Drawings: 1. CRC -3 and PCC; Custom Curb, Inc. 2. PC -2 and PCC; Pate Company. 3. EC -2A and N; Roof Products & Systems Corporation. 4. TC -3 and TP -1; ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. D. Custom Mechanical Equipment Curbs: For mechanical equipment mounted on structural steel frame: 1. CRC -3 and Isolation Rail; Custom Curb, Inc. 2. PC -2 and Iso -Base; Pate Company. 3. RC -2A and VR; Roof Products & Systems Corporation. 4. TC -3 and Vibra-Curb II; ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. E. Vibration Isolation Curbs: 1. Custom Isolation Curb; Custom Curb, Inc. 2. PC -2 and Iso -Base; Pate Company. 3. RC -2A and VR; Roof Products & Systems Corporation. 4. TC -3 and Vibra-Curb II; ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Equipment Supports: Provide metal equipment supports, intemally reinforced and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead Toads, including equipment Toads and other construction to be supported. Fabricate with welded or sealed mechanical comer joints, with stepped integral metal cant raised the thickness of roof insulation and integral formed mounting flange at perimeter bottom. Coordinate dimensions with rough -in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported. 1. Manufacturers: a. CES -2; Custom Curb, Inc. b. ES -2; Pate Company. c. ER -2A; Roof Products & Systems Corporation. d. TEMS-3; ThyCurb; Div. of Thybar Corporation. 2. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick. 3. Factory -install continuous wood nailers 5-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment supports. 4. Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard removable counterflashing, fabricated of same metal and finish as equipment support. 5. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 6. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Sloping Roofs: Where slope of roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate curb units with water diverter or cricket and with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. 2.6 ROOF HATCHES A. Roof Hatches: Fabricate roof hatches with insulated double-wall lids and insulated single-wall curb frame with integral deck mounting flange and lid frame counterflashing. Fabricate with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed comer joints. Provide continuous weather -tight perimeter gasketing and equip with corrosion -resistant or hot -dip galvanized hardware. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bilco Company. b. J. L. Industries, Inc. c. Milcor Inc.; a Gibraltar Company. 2. Loads: Fabricate roof hatches to withstand 40-Ibf/sq. ft. external and 20-Ibf/sq. ft. intemal loads. 3. Type and Size: Single -leaf lid, 30 by 36 inches. 4. Curb and Lid Material: Galvanized steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick. a. Finish: Prime painted. 5. Insulation: Cellulosic -fiber board. 6. Interior Lid Liner. Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as outer metal lid. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 3 • • 7. Exterior Curb Liner. Manufacturer's standard metal liner of same material and finish as metal curb. 8. On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile. 9. Fabricate units to minimum height of 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 10. Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1:48, fabricate hatch curbs with height constant. 11. Hardware: Galvanized steel spring latch with tum handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlock hasps inside and outside. a. Provide 2 -point latch on covers larger than 84 inches. 12. Safety Railing System: Manufacturer's standard complete system including rails, clamps, fasteners, safety barrier at railing opening, and all accessories required for a complete installation. 13. Test Load: a. Top Rails of Guards: 1) Uniform load of 50 Ibf/ ft. applied horizontally and concurrently with 100 Ibf/ ft. applied vertically downward. 2) Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. 3) Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. b. Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck. c. Pipe or Tube: 1 -1/4 -inch ID galvanized pipe or 1 -518 -inch OD galvanized tube. d. Chain Passway Enclosure: Galvanized proof coil chain with quick link on fixed end. e. Pipe Ends and Tops: Covered or plugged with weather -resistant material. f. Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and railing members that are exposed to exterior. g. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a watertight manner. h. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard. 2.7 ROOF SUPPORTS ,A. Pipe Roof Supports: Adjustable height, extruded -aluminum tube, urethane insulation filled, 2 inches in diameter, with aluminum base plates and manufacturer's recommended hardware for mounting to structure, and extruded -aluminum carrier assemblies, suitable for quantity of pipe runs and sizes, with EPDM end caps. Include manufacturer's standard hardware for mounting to structure or structural roof deck. 1. Pipe Support Height: As indicated. 2. Pipe Roller Assembly: Stainless-steel roller assembly sized for supported pipes with extruded aluminum. 3. Pipe Support Flashing: Insulated sleeve flashings with integral base flange, and EPDM grommetted top seal and base seals. a. Metal: Aluminum sheet, 0.064 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories. 2. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. B. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing exposed -to -view components of roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance. ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 4 • • • D. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. E. Roof Curb Installation: Set roof curb so top surface of roof curb is level. F. Equipment Support Installation: Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level. G. Roof Hatch Installation: 1. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. 2. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb. 3. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Seal joints with butyl sealant as required by manufacturer of roof accessories. 3.3 TOUCH UP A. Touch up factory -primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting Division 09 painting Sections. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and comply with ASTM A 780. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 077200 in accordance with repair galvanizing to ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 5 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 078100 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: Exposed SFRM. 1. Provide SFRM materials only in areas as required by the local codes and the authorities having jurisdiction to achieve required fire rating. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" for surface conditions required for structural steel receiving SFRM. 2. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for fire -resistance -rated firestopping systems. 3. Division 07 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for fire -resistance -rated joint systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. SFRM: Sprayed fire -resistive material. B. Exposed: Fire -resistive materials applied to surfaces that are exposed to view when the Work is completed, that are in elevator shafts and machine rooms, that are in mechanical rooms, and that are identified as exposed on Drawings. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following: 1. Locations and types of surface preparations required before applying SFRM. 2. Extent of SFRM for each construction and fire -resistance rating, including the following: a. Applicable fire -resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire -resistance ratings of structural components and assemblies. 3. Treatment of SFRM after application. C. Samples: For each type of colored, exposed SFRM, two Samples, each 4 inches square, of each color, texture, and material formulation to be applied. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. D. Product Certificates: For each type of SFRM, signed by product manufacturer. E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency. F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From SFRM manufacturer indicating the following: 1. Materials have been tested for bond with substrates. 2. Materials have been verified by SFRM manufacturer to be compatible with substrate primers and coatings. 3. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for proposed SFRM. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 1 • H. Research/Evaluation Reports: For SFRM. I. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer. B. Source Limitations: Obtain SFRM through one source from a single manufacturer. C. SFRM Testing: By a qualified testing and inspecting agency engaged by Contractor or manufacturer to test for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods. 1. SFRMs are randomly selected for testing from bags bearing the applicable classification marking of UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Testing is performed on specimens of SFRMs that comply with laboratory testing requirements specified in Part 2 and are otherwise identical to installed fire -resistive materials, including application of accelerant, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, rolling, and water overspray, if any of these are used in final application. 3. Testing is performed on specimens whose application the independent testing and inspecting agency witnessed during preparation and conditioning. Include in test reports a full description of preparation and conditioning of laboratory test specimens. D. Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to test for compliance with requirements for specified performance and test methods. 1. Test for bond per ASTM E 736 and requirements in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials. Provide bond strength indicated in referenced fire -resistance design, but not less than minimum specified in Part 2. 2. Verify that manufacturer, through its own laboratory testing or field experience, has not found primers or coatings to be incompatible with SFRM. E. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the fire -test -response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify bags containing SFRM with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Fire -Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for SFRM serving as direct -applied protection tested per ASTM E 119. 2. Surface-Buming Characteristics: ASTM E 84. F. Provide products containing no detectable asbestos as determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR 763, Subpart E, Appendix E, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to SFRM including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review products, exposure conditions, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, calculations, densities, thicknesses, bond strengths, and other performance requirements. 2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify sequencing and coordination requirements. 3. Review weather predictions, ambient conditions, and proposed temporary protections for SFRM during and after installation. 4. Review surface conditions and preparations. 5. Review field quality -control testing procedures. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, shelf life if applicable, and fire -resistance ratings applicable to Project. B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove from Project site and discard materials whose shelf life has expired. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 2 C. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply SFRM when ambient or substrate temperature is 40 deg F or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application. B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of SFRM. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced -air circulation until fire -resistive material dries thoroughly. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Sequence and coordinate application of SFRM with other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the environment. 2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of fire -resistive material due to exposure to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation. 3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of fire -resistive material to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 4. Do not apply fire -resistive material to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of fire -resistive material. 5. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fire -resistive material until application of fire protection is completed. 6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fire -resistive material has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to defective applications. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Contractor and by Installer, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace SFRMs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cracking, flaking, spelling, or eroding in excess of specified requirements; peeling; or delaminating of SFRM from substrates. b. Not covered under the warranty are failures due to damage by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved during fire -response testing, and other causes not reasonably foreseeable under conditions of normal use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 EXPOSED SFRM A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide W.R. Grace & Co.; Monokote - Type Z106G, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Carboline Co., Fireproofing Products Division. 2. Isolatek International Corporation. B. Material Composition: Manufacturer's standard product, exposed cementitious SFRM, factory -mixed, dry, cement aggregate formulation; or chloride -free formulation of gypsum binders, additives, and inorganic aggregates mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application. C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated, or higher values required to attain required fire -resistance ratings, measured per standard test methods referenced with each property as follows: 1. Dry Density: Values for average and individual densities as required for fire -resistance ratings indicated, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method," but with an average density of not less than 22 Ib/cu. ft. 2. Bond Strength: 434 Ibf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736. 3. Compressive Strength: 51 Ibf/sq. in. minimum per ASTM E 761. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 3 • 4. Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion per ASTM E 937. 5. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 759. 6. Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, or delamination per ASTM E 760. 7. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 g/sq. ft. per ASTM E 859. 8. Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136. 9. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide SFRM with the following surface-buming characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: a. Flame -Spread Index: 10 or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 0. 10. Fungal Resistance: No observed growth on specimens per ASTM G 21. 2.2 AUXILIARY FIRE -RESISTIVE MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary fire -resistive materials that are compatible with SFRM and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire -resistance designs indicated. B. Substrate Primers: For use on each substrate and with each sprayed fire -resistive product, provide primer that complies with one or more of the following requirements: 1. Primer's bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series of bond tests per ASTM E 736. 2. Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for fire -test -response characteristics of SFRM per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Adhesive for Bonding Fire -Resistive Material: Product approved by manufacturer of SFRM. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of work. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following: 1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified. 2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, incompatible encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fire -resistive materials with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 3. Objects penetrating fire -resistive material, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying fire -resistive material. B. Verify that roof construction, installation of roof -top HVAC equipment, and other related work are completed. C. Conduct tests according to fire -resistive material manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire -resistive materials during application. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fire -resistive material, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. C. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM. APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 4 • D. For exposed applications, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of SFRM. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire -resistive products after application. 3.3 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with fire -resistive material manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and spray on fire -resistive material, as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire -resistance ratings indicated. B. Apply SFRM that is identical to products tested as specified in Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article and substantiated by test reports, with respect to rate of application, accelerator use, sealers, topcoats, tamping, troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting test results. C. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying fire -resistive material where required to achieve fire - resistance rating or as recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer for material and application indicated. D. Extend fire -resistive material in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer, install body of fire -resistive covering in a single course. E. Spray apply fire -resistive materials to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer. 3.4 APPLICATION, EXPOSED SFRM A. Apply exposed SFRM in thicknesses and densities not less than those required to achieve fire -resistance ratings designated for each condition, but apply in greater thicknesses and densities if indicated. 1. For steel beams and bracing, provide a thickness of not Tess than 1 inch. 2. For metal roof decks, provide a thickness of not less than 1/2 inch. B. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of material and matching Architect's sample or, if none, finish approved for field -erected mockup. C. Apply exposed SFRM to produce spray -textured finish requiring no further treatment. D. Cure exposed SFRM according to product manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements. B. Tests and Inspections: Testing and inspecting of completed applications of SFRM shall take place in successive stages, in areas of extent and using methods as follows. Do not proceed with application of SFRM for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of SFRM show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values indicated and required for approved fire - resistance design. 1. Thickness for Roof Assemblies: For each 1000 -sq. ft area, or partial area, on each floor, from the average of 4 measurements from a 144 -sq. in. sample area, with sample width of not less than 6 inches per ASTM E 605. 2. Thickness for Structural Frame Members: From a sample of 25 percent of structural members per floor, taking 9 measurements at a single cross section for structural frame beams or girders, 7 measurements of a single cross section for joists and trusses, and 12 measurements of a single cross section for columns per ASTM E 605. 3. Density for Roofs and Structural Frame Members: At frequency and from sample size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 605 or AWCI Technical Manual 12-A, Section 5.4.5, "Displacement Method." APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 5 • • • 4. Bond Strength for Roofs and Structural Framing Members: For each 10,000 -sq. ft. area, or partial area, on each floor, cohesion and adhesion from one sample of size indicated for determining thickness of each type of construction and structural framing member, per ASTM E 736. a. Field test SFRM that is applied to flanges of wide -flange, structural -steel members on surfaces matching those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving fire -resistive material. b. If surfaces of stnictural steel receiving SFRM are primed or otherwise painted for coating materials, perform series of bond tests specified in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory." Provide bond strength indicated in referenced UL fire -resistance criteria, but not less than 150 Ibf/sq. ft. minimum per ASTM E 736. 5. If testing finds applications of SFRM are not in compliance with requirements, testing and inspecting agency will perform additional random testing to determine extent of noncompliance. C. Remove and replace applications of SFRM that do not pass tests and inspections for cohesion and adhesion, for density, or for both and retest as specified above. D. Apply additional SFRM, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate that thickness does not comply with specified requirements, and retest as specified above. 3.6 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIR A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling. B. Protect SFRM, according to advice of product manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so fire protection will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. C. Coordinate application of SFRM with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fire protection. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect SFRM and patch any damaged or removed areas. D. Repair or replace work that has not successfully protected steel. END OF SECTION 078100 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 078100 - 6 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes through -penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire -resistance -rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems." 2. Division 21 Sections specifying fire -suppression piping penetrations. 3. Division 22 and 23 Sections specifying duct and piping penetrations. 4. Division 26, 27, and 28 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through fire -resistance -rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through -penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire -resistance rating of construction penetrated. B. Rated Systems: Provide through -penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 and the following: 1. F -Rated Systems: Provide through -penetration firestop systems with F -ratings indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire -resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. T -Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide through -penetration firestop systems with T - ratings indicated, as well as F -ratings, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. b. Penetrations located outside fire -resistance -rated shaft enclosures. C. For through -penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet -pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture -resistant through -penetration firestop systems. 2. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved, either by installing floor plates or by other means. 3. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through -penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of insulation. D. For through -penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame -spread and smoke - developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each through -penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1 • 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through -penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Through -Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through -penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. Types of penetrating items. 2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire -resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. 3. Through -penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating through -penetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B. Source Limitations: Obtain through -penetration firestop systems, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide through -penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Through -penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Through -penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Through -penetration firestop systems correspond to those indicated by reference to through - penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver through -penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life if applicable, qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials for through -penetration firestop systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install through -penetration firestop systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate through -penetration firestop systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through -penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2 • • • B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core -drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate through - penetration firestop systems. C. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of through -penetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. D. Do not cover up through -penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, through -penetration firestop systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated [in the Through - Penetration Firestop System Schedule at the end of Part 3, that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. 4. Tremco; Sealant/\Neatherproofing Division. 5. USG Corporation. 2.2 FIRESTOPPING, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide through -penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through -penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through -penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components for each through -penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through -penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. 2.3 MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with through -penetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing through -penetration firestop systems to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of through -penetration firestop systems. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with through -penetration firestop systems. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove Iaitance and form -release agents from concrete. PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3 • • B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through -penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through -penetration firestop systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates. 3.3 THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install through -penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems. C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire -resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify through -penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self -adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through -Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through -penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through -penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified, independent inspecting agency to inspect through - penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports. B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through -penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing through -penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through -penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that through - penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4 • • • despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated through -penetration firestop systems immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. 3.7 THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Where UL -classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha -alpha -numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ. B. Firestop Systems with No Penetrating Items, FS -1; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -0001-0999. C. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing, FS -2; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -1001-1999. D. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing, FS -3; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: W -L-1001-1999. E. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing, FS -4; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -2001-2999. F. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables, FS -5; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -3001-3999. G. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays, FS -6; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -4001-4999. H. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes, FS -7; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -5001-5999. I. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes, FS -8; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: W -L-5001-5999. J. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants FS -9; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -6001-6999. K. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants FS -10; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: W -L-6001-6999. L. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants FS -11; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -7001-7999. M. Firestop Systems for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants FS -12; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: W -L-7001-7999. N. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants FS -13; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: C -AJ -8001-8999. O. Firestop Systems for Groupings of Penetrants FS -14; comply with the following: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: W -L-8001-8999. END OF SECTION 078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 078446 - FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fire -resistive joint systems for the following: 1. Head -of -wall joints. 2. Wall-to-wall joints. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for systems installed in openings in walls with and without penetrating items. 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for non -fire -resistive joint sealants. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide fire -resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire - resistance rating of assembly in which fire -resistive joint systems are installed. B. Joint Systems in and between Fire -Resistance -Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire -resistance ratings of construction that they join and with movement capabilities indicated as determined by UL 2079. 1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test. C. For fire -resistive systems exposed to view, provide products with flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each fire -resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire -resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire -resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items. C. Product Certificates: For each type of fire -resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Evaluation Reports: Evidence of fire -resistive joint systems' compliance with ICBG ES AC30, from the ICBG Evaluation Service. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." B. Source Limitations: Obtain fire -resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer. FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 1 • C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide fire -resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire -resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire -resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire -resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: a. Fire -resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire -resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver fire -resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle materials for fire -resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire -resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Ventilate fire -resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced -air circulation. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire -resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire -resistive joint systems. C. Do not cover up fire -resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fire -resistive joint systems that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those systems indicated in the Fire -Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS A. Compatibility: Provide fire -resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Accessories: Provide components of fire -resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated. FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 2 • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire -resistive joint systems to comply with fire - resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce dean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire -resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire -resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire -resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install fire -resistive joint systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire -resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. C. Install fill materials for fire -resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire -resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire -resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports. B. Testing Services: Inspecting of completed installations of fire -resistive joint systems shall take place in successive stages as installation of fire -resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements. 1. Inspecting agency shall state in each report whether inspected fire -resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements. C. Remove and replace fire -resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 3 • • • E. Proceed with enclosing fire -resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire -resistive joint systems comply with requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire -resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire -resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire -resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire -resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements. 3.6 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire -Resistance -Rated Constructions: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN. B. Head -of -Wall Fire -Resistive Joint Systems, FRJS-1: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: a. HW -D-1000-1999. b. HW -S-1000-1999. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 hour, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class I. C. Wall -to -Wall Fire -Resistive Joint Systems, FRJS-2: 1. Available UL -Classified Systems: a. WW -D-0001-0999. b. WW -S-0001-0999. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 hour, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class I. END OF SECTION 078446 FIRE -RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 078446 - 4 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section: 1. Exterior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non -traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Joints between different materials listed above. c. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors and windows. d. Control and expansion joints in overhead surfaces. e. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Joints between different materials listed above. d. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal non -traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated. c. Tile control and expansion joints. d. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry walls. e. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. f. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. g. Other joints as indicated. 4. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation joints in cast -in-place concrete slabs. b. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. c. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Water -Drainage Exterior Insulation and Finish System (EIFS)" for sealing joints in EIFS construction. 2. Division 07 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for sealing joints in fire -resistance -rated construction. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 4. Division 09 Section 'Tiling" for sealing tile joints. 5. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters of acoustical ceilings. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint -sealant product indicated. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1 • B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2 -inch wide joints formed between two 6 -inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. C. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint -sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint -sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than four pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint - sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint -sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint -sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are Tess than those allowed by joint -sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to fumish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2 • • PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid -applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. B. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600. C. Single -Component Neutral -Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Omniseal. b. Dow Coming Corporation; 791. c. Pecora Corporation; 895. d. Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI -641. e. Tremco; Spectrem 3. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (non -sag). 3. Class: 50. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (non -traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 6. Stain -Test -Response Characteristics: Non -staining to porous substrates per ASTM C 1248. 7. Color. To match adjacent surfaces as selected by Architect. D. Single -Component Mildew -Resistant Acid -Curing Silicone Sealant: 1. Products: a. Dow Coming Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700. c. Tremco; Tremsil 200 White. 2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (non -sag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (non -traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. E. Multi -Component Non -Sag Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: a. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2. b. Schnee -Morehead, Inc.; Permathane SM 7200. c. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG. d. Tremco; Vulkem 227. 2. Type and Grade: M (multi-component) and NS (non -sag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (non -traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. F. Multi -Component Pourable Urethane Sealant: 1. Products: a. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; SL 2. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II -SG. c. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c SL. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3 • 2. Type and Grade: M (multi-component) and P (pourable). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (non -traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 834, Type P, Grade NF. 1. Products: a. Sonnebom, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac. b. Bostik Findley; Chem -Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC -20+. d. Schnee -Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200. e. Tremco; Tremflex 834. 2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard non -sag, paintable, non- staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airbome sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: a. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; AC -20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, non-drying, non -hardening, non -skinning, non -staining, gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airbome sound transmission. 1. Products: a. Ohio Sealants, Inc., Pro -Series SC -170 Rubber Base Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation; BA -98. c. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant. 2.6 JOINT -SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed -cell material with a surface skin) as approved in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. D. Bond -Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint -filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer. Material recommended by joint -sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non -staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4 • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint -sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint - sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a dean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil -free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. 3. Remove laitance and form -release agents from concrete. 4. Clean non -porous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where indicated or recommended in writing by joint -sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint -sealant -substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint -sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint -sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. E. Install bond -breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5 • • F. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. G. Tooling of Non -Sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field -Adhesion Testing: Field test joint -sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform five tests for the first 500 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193, as appropriate for type of joint -sealant application indicated. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field -adhesion -test log. 4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled -out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field -adhesion hand -pull test criteria. b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. 5. Record test results in a field -adhesion -test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are dean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. • B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6 • • 3.7 JOINT -SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior horizontal non -traffic and traffic isolation and contraction joints in cast -in- place concrete slabs. 1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component pourable urethane sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component non -sag urethane sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior vertical joints between different materials listed above. 1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component non -sag urethane sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior perimeter joints between exterior unit masonry or exterior insulation and finish systems and frames of doors or windows. 1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component non -sag urethane sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. E. Joint -Sealant Application: Exterior control and expansion joints in ceilings and other overhead surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component non -sag urethane sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. F. Joint -Sealant Application: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component neutral -curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range_ G. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. H. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior ceramic tile expansion, control, contraction, and isolation joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant: Multi-component non -sag urethane sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. I. Joint -Sealant Application: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. 1. Joint Sealant: Single -component mildew -resistant acid -curing silicone sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. J. Joint -Sealant Application: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit masonry and walls and partitions. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. K. Joint -Sealant Application: Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. 1. Joint Sealant: Latex sealant. 2. Joint -Sealant Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. END OF SECTION 079200 JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for embedding anchors for hollow metal work into masonry construction. 2. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass lites in hollow metal doors. 4. Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting" and "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and frames. 5. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings. B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire -resistance rating, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Samples for Verification: 1. For the following items, prepared on Samples about 12 by 12 inches to demonstrate compliance with requirements for quality of materials and construction: a. Doors: Show vertical -edge, top, and bottom construction; core construction; and hinge and other applied hardware reinforcement. Include separate section showing glazing if applicable. b. Frames: Show profile, comer joint, floor and wall anchors, and silencers. Include separate section showing fixed hollow metal panels and glazing if applicable. D. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1 • • 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer. B. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project -site storage. Do not use non -vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory -finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs. C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4 -inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4 -inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Fumish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Supplier. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hollow metal doors and frames as scheduled on Drawings by the following: 1. Universal Manufacturing Company, Inc.; 5366 Crestview Road; Memphis, Tennessee 38134; Contact, Ted Tummins; Telephone, (901) 458-5881; Fax, (901) 324-7115; Order Placement, (800) 821-1414. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Cold -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot -Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. C. Metallic -Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 metallic coating. D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008 or ASTM A 1011, hot- dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B. E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153. F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143. G. Mineral -Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-Ib/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame -spread and smoke - development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2 • • H. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." I. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15 -mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert -type non -corrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft -paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral -board, or vertical steel -stiffener core. a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire -protection ratings indicated. b. Thermal -Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal - resistance value (R -value) of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) Locations: Exterior doors. 3. Vertical Edges for Single -Acting Doors: Beveled edge. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042 -inch thick, end closures or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), Model 2 (Seamless), 1-3/4 inch width. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. 2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile. B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic -coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped comers. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Exterior Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch thick steel sheet. C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold -rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped comers. 2. Frames for Interior Steel Doors: 0.053 -inch thick steel sheet. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053 -inch thick steel sheet. D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames. 2.5 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap -and -stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 3 • • 2. Stud -Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In -Place Masonry: Minimum 3/8 -inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location. B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip -type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4 -inch -thick by 1 -inch wide steel. B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick. 2.8 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117. C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep -hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval -head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb. b. Stud -Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Four anchors per jamb. c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Post installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single -Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot -rolled steel sheet. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates fumished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface -mounted door hardware. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 4 • • 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form comers of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated. 2.9 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer. Manufacturer's standard, fast -curing, lead- and chromate -free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field -applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine roughing -in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded -in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face comers of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor. C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface -mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metas work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire -protection -rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing anti - freezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post -installed expansion anchors. HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 5 • • a. Floor anchors may be set with powder -actuated fasteners instead of post -installed expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal -Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral -fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In -Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with post -installed expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In -Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with post -installed expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Pius or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face comers of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non -Fire -Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch. 2. Fire -Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat or oval -head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each comer. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime -Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air -drying, rust -inhibitive primer. D. Metallic -Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Six -Month Adjustment Approximately six months after the date of Substantial Completion, the Installer, accompanied by representatives of the manufacturers of latchsets and locksets and of door control devices, and of other major hardware suppliers, shall retum to the Project to perform the following work: 1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to restore function of doors and hardware to comply with specified requirements. 2. Consult with an instruct Owner's personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. 3. Replace hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of hardware units. 4. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance of the hardware. END OF SECTION 081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 6 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid -core doors with wood -veneer, medium -density -overlay, or plastic -laminate faces. 2. Shop priming flush wood doors. 3. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for field finishing doors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory -finishing specifications. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door, elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire -protection ratings for fire -rated doors. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors." C. Fire -Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire -protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1 • • 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weather -tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42 -by -84 -inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3 -inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid -Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Supplier. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flush wood doors as scheduled on Drawings by the following: 1. Universal Manufacturing Company, Inc.; 5366 Crestview Road; Memphis, Tennessee 38134; Contact, Ted Tummins; Telephone, (901) 458-5881; Fax, (901) 324-7115; Order Placement, (800) 821-1414. 2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. Low -Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty, unless noted otherwise. C. Particleboard -Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -2, made with binder containing no urea -formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard -core doors as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. 3. Provide doors with either glued -wood -stave or structural -composite -lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices. D. Structural -Composite -Lumber -Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber. WDMA I.S.10. a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 Ibf minimum. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 Ibf. minimum E. Fire -Protection -Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire -protection rating indicated. 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. 2. Pairs: Provide fire -retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed -steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. F. Mineral -Core Doors: 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire -protection rating indicated. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw -holding capability approved for use in doors of fire -protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through -bolting hardware. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated -edge construction with improved screw - holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2 • • 2.3 VENEERED -FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Select white birch, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or required by Architect. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 7. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building. 8. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species. 9. Core: Particleboard. 10. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 11. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.4 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Faces: Any closed -grain hardwood of mill option. a. Apply medium -density overlay to standard -thickness, closed -grain, hardwood face veneers or directly to high-density hardboard cross -bands. b. Hardboard Faces: AHA A135.4, Class 1 (tempered) or Class 2 (standard). c. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or 160. 3. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Any dosed -grain hardwood. 4. Core: Particleboard. 5. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 6. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.5 PLASTIC -LAMINATE -FACED DOORS A. Interior Solid -Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Plastic -Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS. 3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer's full range. 4. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Hardwood edges for staining to match faces or plastic laminate that matches faces, applied before faces. 5. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. 6. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before faces and cross -bands are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 7. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.6 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Metal Louvers: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company. c. Hiawatha Incorporated. 2. Blade Type: Vision -proof, inverted V. 3. Metal and Finish: Hot -dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish. B. Louvers for Fire -Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire -protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Hiawatha Incorporated. c. McGill Architectural Products. 2. Metal and Finish: Hot -dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3 • C. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturers standard wood beads as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: a. Same species as door faces at transparent door finish applications. b. Species compatible with door faces at plastic laminate door applications c. Any closed -grain hardwood at opaque door finish applications. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. 3. At wood -core doors with 20 -minute fire -protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. D. Wood -Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire -Rated Doors: Manufacturers standard wood -veneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire - protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire - protection rating indicated. E. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire -Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048 -inch thick, cold -rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish; and approved for use in doors of fire -protection rating indicated. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame -opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115 -W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed -steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire - rated doors. C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 2.8 SHOP PRIMING A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime doors with one coat of wood primer specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting". Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with primer. B. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish. 2.9 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish. Field finish doors indicated to receive opaque finish. C. Finish doors at factory where indicated in schedules or on Drawings as factory finished. D. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR -6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match Architects sample. 4. Effect: Open -grain finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4 • • E. Opaque Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA OP -6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Color. Match Architect's sample. 4. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire -rated doors in corresponding fire -rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Job -Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire -rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire -rated doors. 2. Bevel non -fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire -rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory -Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory -Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 5 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wall and ceiling access doors and frames. 1. Access doors and frames are to be used where required to access concealed items for maintenance and systems operation where indicated on Drawings or as required due to system installation. Coordinate access door and frame sizes and locations with Architect prior to installation. a. Provide fire -rated wall and ceiling access doors and frames to correlate with fire rated construction. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches_ 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details relative to materials, fire ratings (if required), materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each door face material, at least 3 by 5 inches in size, in specified finish. D. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire -Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire -test -response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 or UL 10B for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard -size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1 • • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. J. L. Industries, Inc. 2. Karp Associates, Inc. 3. Milcor Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc -coated, ASTM A 591 with cold -rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed. C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." D. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299 -inch zinc -coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board. 2.3 PAINT A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast curing, lead and chromate free, universal modified -alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT -P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide a sound foundation for field -applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 1. Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 2.4 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Access Door and Frame, Type II: Flush, uninsulated, fire -rated access doors and trimless frames, fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Fire -Resistance Rating: 1 -1/2 -hours, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes. 4. Door. Flush panel with a core of mineral -fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch. 5- Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 6. Hinges: Concealed pin type. 7. Automatic Closer. Spring type. 8. Lock: Key operated cylinder lock with interior release. B. Access Door and Frame, Type IV: Flush access doors and trimless frames, fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door. Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060 inch thick sheet metal with drywall bead. 4. Hinges: Spring loaded concealed pin type. 5. Lock: Key operated cylinder lock with interior release. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation. B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness. ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 2 • • • C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Fumish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing. 2. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Fumish adjustable metal masonry anchors. D. Latching Mechanisms: Fumish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, fumish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. For recessed panel doors, provide access sleeves for each locking device. Fumish plastic grommets and install in holes cut through finish. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise darnaged. END OF SECTION 083113 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 3 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior storefront framing. 2. Storefront framing for punched openings. 3. Exterior and interior manual -swing entrance doors and door -frame units. 4. Horizontal -sliding windows (drive-thru windows). B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Automatic Entrances" for automatic entrances. 2. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing installed with aluminum -framed systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Aluminum -framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. f. Sealant failure. g. Failure of operating units. 4. Notice of Acceptance: Provide products, in hurricane regions only, having a current Dade County Notice of Acceptance (NOA). a. Submit structural design and engineering calculations for windows, doors and anchors prepared by, signed, and sealed by a licensed professional engineer within the same state as the designated construction location b. All storefront window anchorage shall be designed to comply with the local wind load requirements of the designated construction location. B. Structural Loads: Provide aluminum -framed storefront system designed to perform under a wind pressure of 30Ibf/sq.ft. acting inward and outward on adjoining window surfaces, but not for simultaneous occurrence. Anchors used to secure to the building shall be designed and engineered to comply with wind load requirements to comply with applicable building code requirements. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1 C. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed U175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch. D. Structural -Test Performance: Provide aluminum -framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind -load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds. E. Windbome-Debris-Impact-Resistance Performance: Provide aluminum -framed systems that pass missile - impact and cyclic -pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 or AAMA 506. 1. Large -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located within 30 feet of grade. 2. Small -Missile Impact: For aluminum -framed systems located more than 30 feet above grade. F. Structural Support Movement: Provide aluminum -framed systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection. G. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum -framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static -air -pressure difference of 6.24 Ibf/sq. ft. H. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum -framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a minimum static -air -pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind -load design pressure, but not less than 10 Ibf/sq. ft. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum -framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum -framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation -resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 35 when tested according to AAMA 1503. K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum -framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U -factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503. L. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide aluminum -framed systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum -framed systems. B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum -framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior. C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2 E. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For aluminum -framed systems, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. F. Welding certificates. G. Maintenance Data: For aluminum -framed systems to include in maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review. C. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. D. Source Limitations for Aluminum -Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer. E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum -framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum -framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: Five (5) years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Entrance Door Hardware: Fumish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3 • • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide aluminum -framed entrances and storefronts products by one of the following: 1. Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc. 2. EFCO Corporation. 3. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company. 4. Tubelite. 5. United States Aluminum. 6. YKK AP America Inc. B. Manufacturers Supplier. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide horizontal -sliding windows (drive- thru windows) products by the following: 1. Ready Access Manufacturing Company; 1815 Arthur Drive; West Chicago, Illinois 60185; telephone (800) 621-5045; fax, (630) 876-7767. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc -rich, corrosion -resistant primer, complying with SSPC- PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 2. Cold -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008. 3. Hot -Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011. 2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded -aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required for support of imposed loads. 1. Construction: a. Interior Aluminum Framing: Non -thermal. b. Exterior Aluminum Framing: Thermally broken. 2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 3. Glazing Plane: Center. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non -staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, non -staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or tuming out from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. D. Masonry Inserts: Hot -dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable -iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153. E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant, non -staining, non-bleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4 2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturers standard elastomeric type. 2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual -swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1 -3/4 -inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125 -inch thick, extruded -aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Medium stile; 3 -1/2 -inch nominal width or narrow stile; 2 -1/8 -inch nominal width, as indicated on Drawings. a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor or ground plane. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturers standard snap -on, extruded -aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide non -removable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum -framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Bituminous Paint: Cold -applied, asphalt -mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30 -mil thickness per coat. 2.7 FABRICATION A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior for vision glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using shear -block system or screw -spline system. F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. 2. At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal -to -metal contact. Install three silencers on strike jamb of single -door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5 G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms. H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory -installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISH SYSTEMS A. Provide one of the following aluminum finish systems which are either as indicated on Drawings or as required by Architect (or the Area Construction Manager). 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. a. Color. As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 3. High -Performance Organic Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non -movement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weather -tight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weather -tight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping. 2. Field -Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface -mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6 Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants' to produce weather -tight installation. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum -framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at comers, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of representative areas to determine compliance of installed systems with specified requirements shall take place as follows and in successive phases as indicated on Drawings. Do not proceed with installation of the next area until test results for previously completed areas show compliance with requirements. 1. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, a minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum -framed systems designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. C. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. E. Aluminum -framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. F. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3 -second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70 -degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge. END OF SECTION 084113 ALUMINUM -FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 7 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Commercial door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. b. Other doors to the extent indicated. 2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections. 3. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" for door silencers provided as part of hollow - metal frames. 2. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for integral intumescent seals provided as part of fire -rated labeled assemblies. 3. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for low -voltage wiring work. C. Products fumished, but not installed, under this Section include the following. Coordinating, purchasing, delivering, and scheduling remain requirements of this Section. 1. Cylinders for locks specified in other Sections. 2. Permanent cores to be installed by Owner. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer. 1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks, latches, and closers. E. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include final hardware schedule. F. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. G. Other Action Submittals: 1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. a. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." Double space entries, and number and date each page. b. Content: Include the following information: 1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door and frame. 2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware item. Include description and function of each loc kset and exit device. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 • • • 3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and manufacturer. 4) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. 7) Mounting locations for door hardware. 8) Door and frame sizes and materials. 9) Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems. a) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter, authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter, unauthorized person wants to exit. 10) List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets. 2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer. 1. Installer's responsibilities indude supplying and installing door hardware and providing a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity. 3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. C. Fire -Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in fumace shall be established at 40 inches or Tess above the sill. D. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure Tock -up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets, and indude basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Area Construction Manager. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2 • • • 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing -in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finish, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as follows: a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Fumish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Supplier. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide door hardware as scheduled on Drawings by the following: 1. Universal Manufacturing Company, Inc.; 5366 Crestview Road; Memphis, Tennessee 38134; Contact, Ted Tummins; Telephone, (901) 458-5881; Fax, (901) 324-7115; Order Placement, (800) 821-1414. 2.2 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturers' products or products complying with BHMA standard referenced. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated. B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article. 2.3 HINGES, GENERAL A. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. 2. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. B. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Entrance Doors: Heavy -weight hinges. 2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges. 3. Interior Doors: Standard -weight hinges. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 • C. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Hinges: Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 2. Interior Hinges: Brass, with stainless-steel pin body and brass protruding heads. 3. Hinges for Fire -Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. D. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 1. Non -removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for out -swinging exterior doors. 2. Comers: Square. E. Fasteners: Comply with the following: 1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors. 3. Threaded -to -the -Head Wood Screws: For fire -rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat -head; machine screws (drilled and tapped holes) for metal doors and wood screws for wood doors. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 2.4 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." 1. Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries, Inc b. Hager Companies c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works. 2.5 PIVOTS AND PIVOT HINGES A. Pivots: BHMA A156.4. Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." 1. Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries, Inc. (BI). b. Hager Companies c. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company d. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works 2.6 CONTINUOUS HINGES A. Standard: BHMA A156.26. 1. Listed under Category N in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." B. General: Minimum 0.120 -inch thick, hinge leaves with minimum overall width of 4 inches; fabricated to full height of door and frame and to template screw locations; with components finished after milling and drilling are complete. C. Continuous, Gear -Type Hinges: Extruded -aluminum, pinless, geared hinge leaves; joined by a continuous extruded -aluminum channel cap; with concealed, self-lubricating thrust bearings. 1. Manufacturers: a. Bommer Industries, Inc b. Hager Companies c. Pemko Manufacturing Co d. Zero International 2.7 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall not require more than 15 lbs to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4 • • C. Electrified Locking Devices: BHMA A156.25. D. Lock Trim: 1. Levers: Cast. 2. Escutcheons (Roses): Cast. 3. Lockset Designs: Provide design indicated on Drawings or, if sets are provided by another manufacturer, provide designs that match those designated. E. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4 -inch latchbolt throw. F. Rabbeted Meeting Doors: Provide special rabbeted front and strike on locksets for rabbeted meeting stiles. G. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. H. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as follows: a. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2.8 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets comply with the following: 1. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13. B. Mortise Locks: Stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; BHMA A156.13. 1. Manufacturers: a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company d. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company 2.9 EXIT LOCKS AND EXIT ALARMS A. Exit Locks: BHMA A156.29, Grade 1, surface mounted, battery powered, housed in metal case; with red - and -white lettering reading "EMERGENCY EXIT PUSH TO OPEN—ALARM WILL SOUND." Include the following features: 1. Low -battery alert. 2. Outside key control. 3. Audible alarm that sounds when unauthorized use of door occurs. 4. Silent alarm with remote signal capability for connection to remote indicating panel. B. Manufacturer. Detex Corporation 2.10 DOOR BOLTS A. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled fire doors, and as follows: 1. Fire -Rated Surface Bolts: Minimum 1 -inch throw; listed and labeled for fire -rated doors. 2. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4 -inch throw. B. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. C. Surface Bolts: BHMA A156.16. 1. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of 1/2 -inch diameter rods of brass, bronze, or stainless steel with minimum 12 -inch long rod for doors up to 84 inches in height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 84 inches. 2. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works d. Trimco DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 r • D. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company c. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works d. Trimco 2.11 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Listed under Category G in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 Ibf. C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require more than 15 Ibf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305. E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252. F. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder, material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Match design for locksets and Iatchsets, unless otherwise indicated. G. Through Bolts: For exit devices and trim on metal doors and fire -rated wood doors. H. Manufacturers: 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co 2. Detex Corporation 3. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America 4. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company 2.12 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following: 1. Number of Pins: Six. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or lover -type cam. 3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat -type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. a. High -Security Grade: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1A, listed and labeled as complying with pick - and drill -resistant testing requirements in UL 437 (Suffix A). C. Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match Iockset; complying with the following: 1. Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key; usable with other manufacturers' cylinders. D. Construction Keying: Comply with the following: 1. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. a. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. b. Fumish permanent cores to Owner for installation. E. Manufacturer. Same manufacturer as for locks and latches. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 • r • 2.13 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, Appendix A. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference, and as follows: 1. Master Key System: Cylinders are operated by a change key and a master key. 2. Keyed Alike: Key all cylinders to same change key. B. Keys: Nickel silver. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." 2. Quantity: In addition to one extra key blank for each lock, provide the following: a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three. b. Master Keys: Five. c. Fumish one extra blank for each lock. 2.14 OPERATING TRIM A. Standard: BHMA A156.6 and as illustrated on Drawings. B. Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies 2. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company 3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company 4. Trimco 2.15 CLOSERS A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1. 1. Comply with the following maximum opening -force requirements: a. Interior, Non -Fire -Rated Hinged Doors: 5 Ibf applied perpendicular to door. b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall not require more than 30 lbs to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbs to open door to minimum required width. C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory -sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. Listed under Category C in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. DORMA Architectural Hardware; Member of The DORMA Group North America (DAH). b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company c. Norton Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company 2.16 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Size: 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self -tapping screws. C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from material indicated in door hardware sets. 1. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 • • d. Trimco 2.17 STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. 1. Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are scheduled or indicated. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall stops are not appropriate, provide overhead holders. B. Combination Floor and Wall Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated. C. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch; fabricated for drilled -in application to frame. D. Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies 2. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company 3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company 4. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works 5. Trimco 2.18 DOOR GASKETING A. Standard: BHMA A156.22, Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non -corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283. D. Fire -Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252. 1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in fumace shall be established at 40 inches or Tess above the sill. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702. G. Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies 2. National Guard Products 3. Pemko Manufacturing Co 4. Reese Enterprises 5. Zero International 2.19 THRESHOLDS A. Standard: BHMA A156.21. Listed under Category J in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)" and ANSI A117.1. 1. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than 1/2 inch high. C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch high. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 • • D. Manufacturers: 1. Hager Companies (HAG).National Guard Products 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co 3. Reese Enterprises 4. Zero International 2.20 FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Fumish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat -head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire -rated applications: a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames. 3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire -rated applications unless door blocking is provided: a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface -mounted exit devices. 4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow -metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors." 2.21 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine roughing -in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 Series. 1. Surface -Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI A250.6. DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 • • B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115 -W Series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated on Drawings, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with goveming regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface -mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 DOOR HARDWARE A. Door No. 1 (Exterior Entrance): 1. Closer. LCN 4021 x 18 2. Hinges: Offset pivot; ANSI -A-156.4; Grade 1; exposed parts of cast aluminum alloy, as supplied by door manufacturer 3. Push/Pull Handle: Kawneer No. CO -9 or Hager Push/Pull Set 164DN/B 4. Panic Hardware: Adams Rite Manufacturing; finish to match storefront 5. Threshold: National Guard Products; saddle type threshold 325; 36 -inches wide x 1/2 -inch rise (ADA accessible) 6. Weather -Stripping: Compression weather-stripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weather-stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge; EDPM or vinyl gasket weather-stripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold 7. Sign: Mounted onto door with the following type, "THIS DOOR MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED WHENEVER THE BUILDING IS OCCUPIED/DURING BUSINESS HOURS" B. Door No. 2 (Interior Vestibule): 1. Closer. LCN 4021 x 18 2. Hinges: Offset pivot; ANSI -A-156.4; Grade 1; as supplied by door manufacturer 3. Push/Pull Handle: Hager Push/Pull Set 164DN/B DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 C. Door No. 3 (Support Door): 1. Closer. LCN 4111 H-CUSH 2. Hinges: Hager Roton 780-112HD; clear anodized finish 3. Lock Set McDonald's special security lock set; mortised lock with "jimmy plate" as modified by hardware supplier 4. Panic Hardware: Von Duprin 22E0; exit only panic, no cylinder, or, Von Duprin 9975 5. Door Alarm: Detex, Model No. 2500 -ACF 6. Weather -Stripping: National Guard 1-60A; compression weather-stripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weather-stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge; EDPM or vinyl gasket weather-stripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold 7. Door Silencers: Hager, 3 per door 8. Security Window. National Guard Products; 6 -inch x 6 -inch security frame view window with "Flop" 9. Threshold: National Guard Products; saddle type threshold 325-DKB; 48 -inches wide x 1/2 -inch rise (ADA accessible) 10. Door Sweep: National Guard Products 101 -AV, 48 -inches 11. 12 -inch latch guard D. Door No. 3A (Exterior Freezer Door): 1. Hinges: Hager Roton 780-112HD; clear anodized finish (Optional hinge selection, Hager Roton BB1279, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP) 2. Lock Set: Schlage dead bolt lock, B-661 3. Pull Handle: Hager H -3-E 4. Weather -Stripping: National Guard 1-60A; compression weather-stripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weather-stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge; EDPM or vinyl gasket weather-stripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold 5. Door Silencers: Hager, 3 per door 6. Security Window. National Guard Products; 6 -inch x 6 -inch security frame view window with "Flop" 7. Threshold: National Guard Products; saddle type threshold 325-DKB; 48 -inches wide x 1/2 -inch rise (ADA accessible) 8. Door Sweep: National Guard Products 101 -AV, 48 -inches E. Door No. 4 (Rear Exit Door): 1. Continuous Hinge: Hager Roton 780-112HD; dear anodized finish 2. Closer. LCN-4111 H-CUSH 3. Threshold: National Guard Products; saddle type threshold 325-DKB; 36 -inches wide x 1/2 -inch rise (ADA accessible) (All other door hardware is the same as Door Hardware Set No.3) F. Door No.5 (Restroom Entrance Door) (Tight Fitting): 1. Closer. LCN-1521, pull side mounted 2. Hinges: Hager BB1279; US 26D; 4 -1/2 -inch x 4 -12 -inch; 1-1/2 pair, or equal 3. Push/ Pull Plate: a. Push; Hager 30S, 4 -inch x 16 -inch; US 28 b. Pull: Hager H -33E, 4 -inch x 16 -inch plate; US 28 4. Wall Stop: Hager 236W 5. Kick Plates: 8 -inch x 34 -inch x 18 gauge; satin; US 26D; 2 per door 6. Door Silencers: Hager, 3 per door 7. Safety Guards: Finger safe MKIA open hinge side and MKIB closed hinge of door G. Door Nos. 6 and 6A (Restroom Stall Doors): 1. Hinges: Hager B1250; US 26D; 4 -1/2 -inch x 4 -12 -inch; 1 -pair 2. Lockset: Hager 3115 (modified); US 26D; dead bolt with pulls 3. Wall Stop: Hager 236W 4. Coat Hook: Bradley 923 robe hook; installed inside face of door at 48 -inches AFF H. Door Nos. 7 and 8 (Closet Doors): 1. Hinges: Hager BB1279; US 26D; 4 -1/2 -inch x 4 -12 -inch; 1-1/2 pair; or equal 2. Lockset: Schlage D -80 -PD; Rhodes; US 26D finish 3. Grille: 18 -inch x 18 -inch metal louvered grille at base of door (Door No. 7) 4. Grille: 12 -inch x 18 -inch metal louvered grille at base of door (Door No. 8) Door No.9 (Door at Front Counter): 1. All door hardware for refrigerator cooler/freezer provided by manufacturer. Manufacturer. Kolpak; Highway 641 North McCorkle Park Road; Parsons, TN 38363 Phone: 800-334-4675 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 • • • Hardware provided: 1. Magnetic perimeter door gasket 2. Threshold reinforced plastic (FRP) 3. POSI-Seal door closer 4. Stationary door pull handle, chrome 5. Interior safety release handle 6. Hinges, brushed chrome cast alloy J. Door No. 10 (Freezer/Cooler Doors): 1. Closer. LCN-1521, pull side mounted 2. Hinges: Hager BB1279; US 26D; 4 -1/2 -inch x 4 -12 -inch; 1-1/2 pair, or equal 3. Lockset: Schlage D -405 -RHO; US 26D finish 4. Kick Plates: 8 -inch x 34 -inch x 18 gauge; US 26D; satin; 2 per door 5. Door Silencers: Hager, 3 per door 6. Safety Guards: Finger safe MKIA open hinge side and MKIB closed hinge of door K. Door No. 11 (Unisex Restroom Door): 1. Closer. LCN 4041 x 18 2. Hinges: Center pivot set; ANSI -A-156.4; Grade 1; cast aluminum alloy, as supplied by door manufacturer 3. Lockset: Adams Rite maximum security lock with cylinder, outside cylinder on only one door; inside cylinder to be fumished on all doors; aluminum; armor face -plate, five-ply steel; bolt face to match doors; bolt to be corrosion -resistant plated 4. Pull Handle: Kawneer No. CO 9 5. Panic Hardware: Adams Rite Manufacturing; finish to match storefront 6. Threshold: National Guard Products; saddle type threshold 325-DKB; 36 -inches wide x 1/2 -inch rise (ADA accessible) 7. Weather -Stripping: National Guard 1-60A; compression weather-stripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weather-stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge; EDPM or vinyl gasket weather-stripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold 8. Door Alarm: Detex, Model No. 2500 -ACS L. Door No. 12 (Exterior Playplace Exit Door): 1. Closer. LCN 4021 x 18 2. Hinges: Offset pivot; ANSI -A-156.4; Grade 1; exposed parts of cast aluminum alloy, as supplied by door manufacturer 3. Push/Pull Handle: Kawneer No. CO -9 or Hager Push/Pull Set 164DN/B 4. Panic Hardware: Adams Rite Manufacturing; finish to match storefront 5. Threshold: National Guard Products; saddle type threshold 325; 36 -inches wide x 1/2 -inch rise (ADA accessible) 6. Weather -Stripping: Compression weather-stripping against fixed stops; at other edges, provide sliding weather-stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge; EDPM or vinyl gasket weather-stripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold 7. Alarm — Detex Model No. 2500 -ACS END OF SECTION 087100 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 087113 - AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Low-energy, power -open door operators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic door operators. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends electrical signal to automatic door operator to open door. B. Safety Device: Device that prevents door from opening or closing. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Opening and Closing Forces: Not more than 15 lbf 1 inch from the latch edge of the door. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for automatic door operators and activation and safety devices. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for automatic door operators. Include locations and elevations of entrances showing activation and safety devices. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples: For each type of exposed component and door control indicated. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Field quality -control test reports. F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For automatic door operators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project, and who employs an inspector certified by AAADM. 1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 1 • • B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company certificate issued by AAADM. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency with inspector certified by AAADM. D. Source Limitations: Obtain automatic door operators through one source from a single manufacturer. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify door openings by field measurements before fabrication of exposed covers for automatic door operators and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing automatic door operators. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing automatic door operators to comply with indicated requirements. B. Electrical System Roughing -in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic door operators with connections to power supplies. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of automatic door operators that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Faulty or sporadic operation of automatic door operator or activation and safety devices. b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering or use. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide three months' full maintenance by skilled employees of automatic door operator Installer. Include quarterly planned and preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of wom or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door operation. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Engage inspector certified by AAADM to perform safety inspection after each adjustment or repair and at end of maintenance period. Submit completed inspection form to Owner. 2. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 3. Include 24 -hour -per -day, 7 -day -per -week emergency callback service. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc. 2. Dor-O-Matic, Inc.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 3. Horton Automatics. 4. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 5. Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 2 • • 2.2 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with standards indicated below. 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M. 2.3 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance -free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. 1. Where indicated for center -pivoted doors, provide emergency breakout feature for reverse swing of doors. B. Electromechanical Operating System: Unit powered by permanent -magnet dc motor, with closing speed controlled mechanically by gear train and dynamically by braking action of electric motor, and with manual operation including spring dosing with power off. C. Hinge Operation: Refer to Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" to determine type of hinge for each door that door operator shall accommodate. D. Housing: Fabricated from 0.125 -inch -thick extruded or formed aluminum. E. Exposed Cover. Fabricated from 0.125 -inch -thick extruded aluminum; continuous over full width of door opening]; with enclosed end caps, provision for maintenance access, and fasteners concealed when door is in closed position. 1. Finish: Match door and frame. 2.4 LOW-ENERGY, POWER -OPEN DOOR OPERATORS A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.19. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Not more than 15 Ibf 1 inch from latch edge of door to prevent stopped door from opening or closing. 2. If power fails, not more than 30 Ibf 1 inch from latch edge of door to manually set door in motion. C. Operation: Power opening and spring closing. When not in automatic mode, door operator shall function as manual door closer, with or without electrical power. 1. Control speed of cycle by motor as dynamic brake. 2. Power -Assisted Opening: Power -assisted opening that reduces force to open self-closing door. Pushing or pulling on door activates automatic door operator. D. Operating System: Electromechanical. E. Microprocessor Control Unit: Solid-state controls. F. Features: 1. Adjustable opening and closing speed. 2. Adjustable closing force. 3. Adjustable backcheck. 4. Adjustable latch speed. 5. Adjustable hold -open time of not less than 0 to 30 seconds. 6. Adjustable time delay. 7. Adjustable acceleration. 8. Obstruction recycle. G. Mounting: Surface. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 3 • • 2.5 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Wall Push -Plate Switch: Manufacturer's standard semi -flush, wall -mounted, door control switch; consisting of round or square, flat push plate; of material indicated; and actuator mounted in recessed junction box. Provide engraved message as indicated. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open." B. Remote Switch: Manufacturer's standard surface -mounted, door control switch; consisting of rectangular, flat push plate; of material indicated; and actuator mounted in junction box. Provide engraved message as indicated. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open." 3. Mounting: Jamb, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self -protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Automatic Door Operator Signage: Comply with BHMA A156.10. B. Low -Energy Automatic Door Operator Signage: Comply with BHMA A156.19. 2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.8 ALUMINUM FINISH SYSTEMS A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. 1. Aluminum finishes shall match finish selection of Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefront window system. B. Provide one of the following aluminum finish systems which are either as indicated on Drawings or as required by Architect (or the Area Construction Manager). 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker. a. Color. As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities. 3. High -Performance Organic Finish: 2 -coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. a. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, door and frame supports, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic door operators. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 4 • • B. Examine roughing -in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic door operator installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install complete automatic door operator system, including activation and safety devices, control wiring, and remote power units. B. Low -Energy Power Door Operator Installation Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.19 for installation. C. Automatic Door Operators: Install door operator system, including control wiring, as follows: 1. Refer to Division 16 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution system. D. Activation and Safety Devices: Install devices and wiring, including connections to automatic door operators, according to BHMA A156.10 and as follows: 1. Wall Switches: Provide push plates on both sides of each opening indicated to receive automatic door operators. E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for automatic door operators 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices to operate smoothly, easily, and properly, and for safe operation and weather -tight closure. 1. Adjust doors with low-energy door operators to close according to BHMA A156.19. B. Lubricate operators, hardware, and other moving parts. C. After completing installation of exposed, factory -finished automatic door operators, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. D. Readjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts. 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage manufacturer's inspector certified by AAADM to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain automatic door operators END OF SECTION 087113 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 087113 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 088000 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Storefront framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 08 Section "Aluminum -Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for aluminum framing systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating -glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. E. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated -glass standard. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Exterior Wind and Impact Loading: Provide exterior glass to withstand wind loading pressures in accordance with the following C. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300, according to the following requirements: a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.5, "Method 2 -Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. GLAZING 088000 - 1 • 0 b. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not more than 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. 1) Load Duration: 60 seconds or less. c. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all 4 edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch, whichever is less. 1) For insulating glass. d. In areas required to meet hurricane exterior wind and impact loading requirements, provide exterior glass to withstand wind loading pressures in accordance with the following: 1) Provide products meeting the design pressure requirements indicated in the wind tunnel study, RWDI 06-1081. 2) Provide products having a current Dade County (Florida) Notice of Acceptance (NOA). D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime -sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic -glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For laminated -glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating -glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. Center -of -Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program for the following methodologies: a. U -Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated. B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products fumished comply with requirements. 1. For solar -control low -e -coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer. C. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials. D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program. B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: Clear float glass, laminated glass, and insulating glass. C. Source Limitations for Glass Sputter -Coated with Solar -Control Low -E Coatings: Where solar -control low -e coatings of a primary glass manufacturer that has established a certified fabricator program is specified, obtain sputter -coated solar -control low -e -coated glass in fabricated units from a manufacturer that is certified by coated -glass manufacturer. D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated. GLAZING 088000 - 2 • E. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification Council or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Where glazing units are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM -3000, "Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units." G. Insulating -Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the following testing and inspecting agency: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council. 2. Associated Laboratories, Inc. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. B. For insulating -glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating -glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by laminated -glass manufacturer agreeing to replace laminated -glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by insulating -glass manufacturer agreeing to replace insulating -glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below. 1. Warranty Period: 10 -years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. GLAZING 088000 - 3 • 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Heat -Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality -Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller -hearth) process with roll -wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 3. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated. B. Ceramic -Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated), Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality -Q3, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout -resistance test for spandrel glass specified in ASTM C 1048. C. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (pattemed and wired flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Quality -Q-6; and of form and mesh pattern specified. D. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following: 1. Interlayer. Polyvinyl butyral of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation. a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure. 2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets. E. Insulating -Glass Units, General: Factory -assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating -Glass Units" Article. 1. Provide Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety glass is indicated. 3. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating -glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants using Manufacturer's standard sealants. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements: a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish to match framing. b. Desiccant Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. c. Comer Construction: Manufacturer's standard comer construction. 2.3 GLAZING GASKETS A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 4. Any material indicated above. B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed -cell, integral -skinned gaskets of material indicated below, complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Neoprene. 2. EPDM. 3. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber. 4. Any material indicated above. GLAZING 088000 - 4 • 2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements: 1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating -glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid - applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Single -Component Neutral and Basic Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants: a. Products: 1) Dow Coming Corporation; 790. 2) GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 3) Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic). 4) Sonnebom, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal. b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (non -sag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (non -traffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates indicated, O. 1) Use 0 Glazing Substrates: Anodic aluminum. 2.5 GLAZING TAPES A. Back -Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl -based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; non -staining and non -migrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: 1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed -cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). 2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. GLAZING 088000 - 5 • • 2.8 MONOLITHIC FLOAT -GLASS UNITS A. Uncoated Clear Float -Glass Units: Class 1 (dear) annealed or Kind HS (heat -strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2.9 MONOLITHIC WIRED -GLASS UNITS A. Polished Wired -Glass Units: Form 1 (wired glass, polished both sides), Quality -Q6, Mesh 1 (M1) (Diamond), 6.0 mm thick. 1. Manufacturers: a. Asahi/AMA Glass Corp.; affiliated with AFG Industries, Inc. b. Central Glass Co., Ltd.; distributed by Northwestern Industries Inc. c. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd. 2.10 INSULATING -GLASS UNITS A. Solar -Control Low -E Insulating -Glass Units (GL -1): 1. Basis -of -Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc.; Solorban 60, Clear, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd b. Viracon. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: 1 -inch and 1/4 -inch. 3. Interspace Content: Argon. 4. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (dear) float glass, 1/4 -inch thick 5. Indoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass, 1/4 -inch thick 6. Low -E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U -Factor. 0.29 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U -Factor. 0.28 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.44 maximum. 11. Visible Light Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. B. Ceramic -Coated Spandrel Insulating -Glass Units (GL -2): 1. Construction: Provide units that comply with requirements specified for insulating -glass units designated for GL -1, except for indoor lite. 2. Indoor Lite: Ceramic -coated spandrel glass. a. Ceramic Coating Location: Fourth surface, color to match aluminum storefront finish. C. Solar -Control Low -E Laminated Insulating -Glass Units (GL -3): Where exterior glazing required to meet hurricane wind and impact Toad requirements: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: PPG Industries, Inc.; Solorban 60, Clear, or a comparable product by one of the following: a. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd b. Viracon. 2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 -1/4 -inch. 3. Interspace Content: Argon. 4. Outdoor Lite: 1/4 -inch thick heat strengthened clear glass. 5. Indoor Lite: Two layers 1/4 -inch heat strengthened clear laminated glass laminated with dear PVB interlayer as required to wind bome debris protection requirements. 6. Low -E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 7. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 8. Winter Nighttime U -Factor. 0.29 maximum. 9. Summer Daytime U -Factor. 0.28 maximum. 10. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.44 maximum. 11. Visible Light Reflectance: 11 percent maximum. D. Ceramic -Coated Spandrel Laminated Insulating -Glass Units (GL -4): Where exterior glazing required to meet hurricane wind and impact load requirements: 1. Construction: Provide units that comply with requirements specified for insulating -glass units designated for GL -3, except for indoor lite. 2. Indoor Lite: Ceramic -coated spandrel glass. a. Ceramic Coating Location: Fourth surface, color to match aluminum storefront finish. GLAZING 088000 - 6 • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at comers. 2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass -framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge darnage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant -substrate testing. E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8 -inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at comers and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent comers from pulling away; seal comer joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. GLAZING 088000 - 7 • 0 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at comers of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at comers. C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at comers and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 LOCK -STRIP GASKET GLAZING A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove non -permanent labels, and clean surfaces. GLAZING 088000 - 8 • • • B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from constriction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period. E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. END OF SECTION 088000 GLAZING 088000 - 9 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes non -load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications: 1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc). B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non -load-bearing wall studs. 2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed with Z-shaped furring members. 3. Division 07 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for head -of -wall joint systems installed with non - load -bearing steel framing. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies that incorporate non -load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 NON -LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot -dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162 -inch diameter. C. Carrying Channels: Cold -rolled, commercial -steel sheet with a base -metal thickness of 0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2 -inch wide flanges. 1. Depth: 2-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold -Rolled Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or to meet performance requirements. b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, 6 -inches, or 8 -inches, as indicated on Drawings. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1 • 3. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct -hung system composed of main beams and cross -furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System. 2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or to meet performance requirements. a. Provide 0.0312 inch thick metal stud framing at walls to support ceramic tile finishes. b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches, 6 -inches, or 8 -inches, as indicated on Drawings. B. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Single Long -Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2 -inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base -Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. D. Cold -Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068 -inch- thick, galvanized steel. E. Hat -Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch. F. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 -inch deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. G. Cold -Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538 -inch bare -steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 -inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2. Fusing Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated -edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare -steel thickness of 0.0312 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625 -inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475 -inch- diameter wire. H. Z -Shaped Furring: With slotted or non -slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, minimum bare -metal thickness of 0.0179 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), non -perforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive -backed, dosed -cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 2 • 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Fumish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire -Resistive Materials: Where required by construction or where indicated on Drawings. 1. Before sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire -resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire -resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non -load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire -resistive materials below that required for fire -resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire -resistive materials from damage. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non -load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Seismic Bracing: Sway -brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt -cut to fit into wall track. NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 3 0 G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1. Space studs as follows: a. Single -Layer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip -Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2 -inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire -Resistance -Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance -rated assembly indicated. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or power -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E. Z -Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section 'Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z -furring members spaced 16 inches o.c. 2. Except at exterior comers, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder -driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior comers, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond comer, on adjacent wall surface, screw -attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior comers, space second member no more than 12 inches from comer and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. END OF SECTION 092216 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 4 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath and solid plaster bases. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing (transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry' for wood framing included in portland cement plaster assemblies. 3. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for sheathing and water-resistant barriers included in portland cement plaster assemblies 4. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed with exterior portland cement plaster (stucco). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each type of colored and textured finish coat indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind. 2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1 • C. Factory -Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. 1. Manufacturers: a. Dale/Incor. b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. c. Marino/Ware; Division of Ware Industries, Inc. d. Unimast, Inc. e. Westem Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Diamond -Mesh Lath: Flat. a. Weight: 2.5 Ib/sq. yd. 3. Flat Rib Lath: Rib depth of not more than 1/8 inch. a. Weight: 2.75 Ib/sq. yd. B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I Grade D, Style 2 vapor -permeable paper. 1. Provide paper -backed lath, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and number of plaster coats required. B. Zinc and Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Accessories: 1. Manufacturers: a. Dale/Incor. b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. c. Marino/Ware; Division of Ware Industries, Inc. d. Unimast, Inc. e. Westem Metal Lath & Steel Framing Systems. 2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot -dip galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653, G60 zinc coating. 3. Comerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Extemal-Comer Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653, G60, hot -dip galvanized zinc coating. 5. Comerbeads: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel. a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. 6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel; square -edged style; with expanded flanges. 7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc -coated (galvanized) steel; one -piece -type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M -shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline -resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 2 D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal -to -metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of not fewer than three exposed threads. E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. F. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral -fiber requirements of assembly. 2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. B. Colorants for Job -Mixed Finish -Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to match Architect's sample. C. Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S. D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897. 1. Color for Job -Mixed Finish Coats: In color matching Architect's sample. E. Ready -Mixed Finish -Coat Plaster: Mill -mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients. 1. Products: a. Califomia Stucco Products Corp.; Conventional Portland Cement Stucco. b. ChemRex; Thoro Stucco. c. Highland Stucco & Lime Products, Inc. d. United States Gypsum Co.; Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco. 2. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.6 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated. 1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base -coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 Ib of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials. Reduce aggregate quantities accordingly to maintain workability. B. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three -coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mixes: a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). C. Base -Coat Mixes for Use over Concrete Unit Masonry: Single base coats for two -coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). 2. Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate. a. Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate D. Job -Mixed Finish -Coat Mixes: 1. Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material (sum of separate volumes of each component material). E. Factory -Prepared Finish -Coat Mixes: For ready -mixed finish -coat plasters, comply with manufacturer's written instructions. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 3 • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames, cast -in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by plastering. 3.3 INSTALLING METAL LATH A. Expanded -Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063. 1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond -mesh lath. 2. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self -furring diamond -mesh lath. 3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for Extemal Comers: 1. Install lath -type extemal-comer reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install comerbead at exterior locations. C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, if not indicated on Drawings, in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes: a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft. b. Horizontal and other Non -vertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft. 2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length -to -width ratios of not greater than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular -shaped areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the comer formed by the dimension change. 3.5 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926. 1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10 -foot straightedge placed on surface. 2. Grout hollow -metal frames, bases, and similar work occurring in plastered areas, with base -coat plaster material, before lathing where necessary. Except where full grouting is indicated or required for fire -resistance rating, grout at least 6 inches at each jamb anchor. 3. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal. 4. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field -applied finishes indicated. B. Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide float finish to match Architect's sample. 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cut, patch, replace, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to restore cracks, dents, and imperfections. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed. PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4 • • • 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from doorframes, windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, • marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering. END OF SECTION 092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 5 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Cold -Formed Metal Framing" for load-bearing steel framing that supports gypsum board. 2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports gypsum board. 3. Division 07 Section 'Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 4. Division 07 Section "Fire -Resistive Joint Systems" for head -of -wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board. 5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in assemblies requiring acoustical joint sealants. 6. Division 09 Section "Non -Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board. 7. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12 -inch long length for each trim accessory indicated. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Resistance -Rated Assemblies: For fire -resistance -rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. 1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36 or ASTM C 1396, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Thickness: 1/2 -inch with long edges tapered. C. Type X: Where required to meet fire -resistance assembly ratings. 1. Thickness: 5/8 -inch with long edges tapered. D. Flexible Type: Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexible than standard regular -type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Thickness: 1/4 -inch with long edges tapered. E. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular -type gypsum board. 1. Thickness: 1/2 -inch with long edges tapered. 2.2 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. FinPan, Inc.; UtiI-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 112 -inch. 3. Width: 36 inches. 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum -coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Comerbead. b. LC -Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L -Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Glass -Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10 -by -10 glass mesh. 3. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting - type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting -type taping compound. a. Use setting -type compound for installing paper -faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting -type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying -type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2 • 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturers written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section 'Thermal Insulation." F. Vapor Retarder. As specified in Division 07 Section 'Thermal Insulation." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow -metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back -blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced intemally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of roof decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4 to 3/8 -inch wide joints to install sealant. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3 • G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non -load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4 to 1/2 -inch wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating intemal comer construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide -dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Regular Type: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type X: Where required for fire -resistance -rated assembly. 3. Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies. 4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. B. Single -Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in altemate courses of panels. b. At high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire - resistance -rated assembly. 3. On Z -furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face -layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face -layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base -layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire -resistance -rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. On Z -furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. 4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set. E. Curved Surfaces: 1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible, across curved surface plus 12 -inch- long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them. 2. For double -layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches o.c. 3.4 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4 • • 3.5 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect]. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Comerbead: Use at outside comers, unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC -Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L -Bead: Use where indicated. 4. Expansion (control) Joint: Use where indicated. 3.6 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Embed tape at joints in ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges where panel surfaces are substrate for tile and where indicated. 3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges at panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections. E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 092900 GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 093000 - TILING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Quarry tile. 2. Glazed wall tile. 3. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for monolithic slab finishes specified for tile substrates. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples: 1. For each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory. D. Qualification Data: For Installer. E. Material Test Reports: For each tile -setting and -grouting product. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. TILING 093000 - 1 • C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Joint sealants. 2. Metal edge strips. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store liquid latexes in unopened containers and protected from freezing. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Fumish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattem, and size indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 2. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified. 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in "Setting and Grouting Materials" Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Pattems: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the following requirements: 1. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Mounting: For factory -mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. TILING 093000 - 2 • • • F. Light Reflectance: Shall meet minimum reflectance values as govemed by CURFFL (Califomia Uniform Retail Food Facilities Law, 2005), where required 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS A. Unglazed Quarry Tile: Square -edged flat tile as follows: 1. Wearing Surface: Abrasive aggregate embedded in surface. 2. Facial Dimensions: 6 by 6 inches. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 4. Face: Plain. 5. For furan -grouted quarry tile, precoat with temporary protective coating. 6. Basis -of -Design Product: Daltile; Div. of Dal -Tile International Inc; Diablo Red or a comparable product of one of the following: a. American Olean; Div. of Dal -Tile International Corp. b. Crossville Ceramics Company, L.P. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc. B. Floor Tile: Flat tile as follows: 1. Composition: Vitreous or impervious natural clay or porcelain. 2. Facial Dimensions: Either 5-13/16 by 5-13/16 or 11-13/16 by 11-13/16 inches, as selected by Architect. All floor tile shall not exceed 13 by 13 inches. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. 5. Basis -of -Design Product: Daltile; Div. of Dal -Tile International Inc; Rocky Mountain Series or a comparable product of one of the following: a. American Olean; Div. of Dal -Tile International Corp. b. Crossville Ceramics Company, L.P. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc. C. Glazed Wall Tile: Flat tile as follows: 1. Module Size: 6 by 6 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 3. Face: Plain with modified square edges or cushion edges. 4. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze. 5. Basis -of -Design Product: Daltile; Div. of Dal -Tile International Inc; Rocky Mountain Series or a comparable product of one of the following: a. American Olean; Div. of Dal -Tile International Corp. b. Crossville Ceramics Company, L.P. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc. D. Glazed Wall Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: 1. Base for Thin -Set Mortar Installations: Straight, module size 4 by 12 inches. 2. Wainscot Cap for Thin -Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 4 by 12 inches. 3. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above. 4. Extemal Comers for Thin -Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose. 5. Internal Comers: Field -butted square corners except with coved base and cap angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes. E. Quarry Tile Trim Units: Matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile and coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: 1. Base: Coved with surface bullnose top edge, facial dimensions 6 by 6 inches. 2. Wainscot Cap: Surface bullnose, facial dimensions 6 by 6 inches. 3. Wainscot Cap for Flush Conditions: Regular flat tile for conditions where tile wainscot is shown flush with wall surface above. 2.4 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Custom Building Products. 2. LATICRETE International Inc. 3. MAPEI Corporation. TILING 093000 - 3 • r 4. TEC Specialty Products Inc. B. Latex -Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry -mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. a. For wall applications, provide non -sagging mortar that complies with Paragraph F-4.6.1 in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. b. Products: 1) FlexBond, Custom Building Products 2) 253; LATICRETE International Inc 3) Ultra/Flex 3; MAPEI Corporation 4) Full Set Plus; TEC Specialty Products Inc. C. Chemical -Resistant, Water -Cleanable, Tile -Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and intermittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 deg F and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. D. Water -Cleanable, Tile -Setting Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or Tess when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Chemical -Resistant Furan Mortar. ANSI A118.5, with carbon filler, unless otherwise indicated. F. Organic Adhesive: ANSI A136.1, Type I, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). G. Polymer -Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7, color as indicated. 1. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene -butadiene rubber in liquid -latex form for addition to prepackaged dry -grout mix. a. Wall Grout A 118.6 (Unsanded grout mixture): 1) Polyblend Unsanded; Custom Building Products 2) 600 Series; LATICRETE International Inc 3) Ker 400; MAPEI Corporation 4) Unsanded Wall Grout; TEC Specialty Products Inc. b. Floor Grout A 118.6 (Sanded grout mixture): 1) Polyblend Unsanded; Custom Building Products 2) 500 Series; LATICRETE International Inc 3) Ker 400; MAPEI Corporation 4) Sanded Floor Grout; TEC Specialty Products Inc. H. Chemical -Resistant Furan Grout: ANSI A118.5. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints, unless otherwise indicated. C. One -Part, Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, 0; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: a. Dow Coming Corporation; Dow Coming 786. b. GE Silicones; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White. TILING 093000 - 4 • D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Products: a. Bostik; Chem -Calk 550. b. Mameco International, Inc.; Vulkem 245. c. Pecora Corporation; NR -200 Urexpan. d. Tremco, Inc.; THC -900. E. Chemical -Resistant Sealants: For chemical -resistant floors, provide chemical -resistant elastomeric sealant of type recommended and produced by chemical -resistant mortar and grout manufacturer for type of application indicated, with proven service record and compatibility with tile and other setting materials, and with chemical resistance equivalent to mortar/grout. Include primer and backer rod recommended by manufacturer. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile -setting materials for installations indicated. 1. Products: a. Level -Quik; Custom Building Products b. 86; LATICRETE International Inc c. ULTRA/PLAN; MAPEI Corporation d. QuikPatch; TEC Specialty Products Inc B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L -shape, height to match tile and setting -bed thickness, metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring applications, white zinc alloy exposed - edge material. C. Tile Cleaner. A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. D. Grout Sealer. Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout. 1. Products: a. Custom Building Products; Grout Sealer. b. MAPEI Corporation; KER 004, Keraseal Penetrating Sealer for Unglazed Grout and Tile. c. TEC Specialty Products Inc.; TA -256 Penetrating Silicone Grout Sealer. 2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. TILING 093000 - 5 • • 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile -setting materials. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin -set mortar that comply with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile - setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile - setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either retum to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. D. Field -Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and comers without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and retums. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates or covers overlap tile. E. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. F. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic tile grouts (sand-portland cement; dry -set, commercial portland cement; and latex- portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 2. For chemical -resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6. 3. For chemical -resistant furan grouts, comply with ANSI A108.8. 3.4 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. a. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. b. Tile floors composed of rib -backed tiles. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Quarry Tile: 3/8 inch. 2. Paver Tile: 1/4 inch. C. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. TILING 093000 - 6 • • • D. Grout Sealer. Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout -sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth. 3.5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCA installation methods and ANSI setting -bed standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with 1/4 inch joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.7 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin -set mortar, TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Floor tile. 2. Thin -Set Mortar. Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer -modified sanded grout. B. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin -set mortar, furan grout; TCA F115 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Unglazed quarry tile. 2. Thin -Set Mortar. Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Chemical -resistant furan grout. C. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin -set mortar, TCA F113 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Unglazed quarry tile. 2. Thin -Set Mortar. Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer -modified sanded grout. 3.8 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over gypsum board; thin -set mortar, TCA W243 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin -Set Mortar. Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer -modified unsanded grout. B. Tile Installation: Interior wall installation over cementitious backer units; thin -set mortar, TCA W244 and ANSI A108.5. 1. Tile Type: Glazed wall tile. 2. Thin -Set Mortar. Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout Polymer -modified unsanded grout. END OF SECTION 093000 TILING 093000 - 7 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings. B. Products fumished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete at ceilings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class. B. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient. C. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12 -inch long Samples of each type, finish, and color. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each acoustical panel ceiling. D. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Surface-Buming Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following surface -burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: a. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions where project required to meet seismic zone requirements and according to the following: 1. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. 2. CISCA's Recommendations for Acoustical Ceilings: Comply with CISCA's "Recommendations for Direct -Hung Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings—Seismic Zones 0-2." ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 -1 • 3. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct -Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies—Seismic Zones 3 & 4." 4. UBC Standard 25-2, "Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and for Lay -in Panel Ceilings." 5. ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9, "Earthquake Loads." 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire -suppression system, and partition assemblies. 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 3.0 percent of quantity installed. 2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 3.0 percent of quantity installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795. B. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. C. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram -positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2 • • 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING, WET FORMED MINERAL FIBER A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Cortege, Medium Texture Acoustical Ceiling Panels - No. 2195, or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation 2. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 2, water felted. 2. Pattern: CD (perforated, small holes and fissured). C. Color. White, unless otherwise noted. D. LR: Not Tess than 0.80. E. NRC: Not less than 0.55. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Beveled tegular. H. Thickness: 5/8 inch. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING, MYLAR FACED MINERAL FIBER A. Basis -of -Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Clean Room Mylar, Smooth Texture Acoustical Ceiling Panels - No. 1715 (field unit) and No. 1720 (border unit), or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. Chicago Metallic Corporation 2. USG Interiors, Inc. B. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type IV, mineral base with membrane -faced overlay; Form 2, water felted; with soil resistant polyester film overlay. 2. Pattern: GH (smooth and printed - non -perforated). C. Color. White. D. LR: Not less than 0.80. E. NRC: Not Tess than 0.55. F. CAC: Not less than 35. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. H. Thickness: 3/4 inch at field units and 5/8 inch at border units. I. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. J. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct -hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3 • B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory -applied finish for type of system indicated. C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc -Coated, Carbon -Steel Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 -inch diameter wire. E. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces, where required to conform with seismic conditions. F. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces, where required to conform with seismic conditions. G. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in- place, where required to conform with seismic conditions. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 200 Snap -Grid Tempra 4000. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Centricitee DXT. B. Wide -Face, Capped, Double -Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold- rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot -dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653, not less than G30 coating designation, with prefinished 15/16 -inch wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate -duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt -edge type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel or aluminum cold -rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. 2.6 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Roll -Formed, Sheet -Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay -in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 2.7 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard non -sag, paintable, non- staining latex sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or Tess when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, non -hardening, non -skinning, non -staining, gunnable, synthetic -rubber sealant, with a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airbome sound transmission. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4 • • PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less -than -half -width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight tums. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight tums. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast -in-place or post - installed anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter comers accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5 • F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings_ Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square -edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal -edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully leaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 096522 - RUBBER RECREATIONAL FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Rubber recreational floor tile. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 1028; "Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull -Meter Method." B. ASTM F 1292-99; "Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surface Systems Under and Around Playground Equipment." C. ASTM E 648; "Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor -Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in fumiture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples: For each type of rubber recreational floor tile, full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store rubber recreational floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. RUBBER RECREATIONAL FLOORING 096522 - 1 • 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not Tess than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Rubber Recreational Floor Tile: Fumish 2 percent of each type, color, and pattem of rubber recreational floor tile installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 AVAILABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dinoflex Manufacturing, Ltd. 2. Pawling Corporation 2.2 RUBBER RECREATIONAL FLOOR TILE A. Rubber Recreational Tiles: Material shall be non -laminated tile formulation composed of 100 percent of post -consumer recycled SBR (styrene butadiene rubber) and 100 percent virgin EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) rubber granules, bound with a polyurethane binder, and precision cut using computerized numerically controlled water-based equipment 1. Static Coefficient of Friction (when tested in accordance with ASTM D2407 a. Greater than 0.80 dry b. Greater than .90 wet 2. Hardness: Not less than 64 as required by ASM F 1344, measured using Shore, Type A durometer per ASTM D 2240. 3. Thickness: 3/8 -inch 4. Size: 37 by 37 inches. 5. Tile to tile interlock, minimum 5 interlocks per side 6. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Provide water-resistant type adhesives according to manufacturer' recommendations and installation guidelines for specific substrate: 1. Use one -component urethane adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Rubber Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. RUBBER RECREATIONAL FLOORING 096522 - 2 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturers written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. D. Do not install rubber recreational floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. Move rubber recreational floor tile products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by rubber recreational floor tile products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattem by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in fumiture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into door reveals and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp -mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect rubber recreational floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 096522 RUBBER RECREATIONAL FLOORING 096522 - 3 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl wall covering. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for priming wall surfaces. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame -resistance characteristics. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of wall covering indicated. C. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36 inch long section of wall covering. 1. Sample from same print run or dye lot to be used for the Work. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of fabric. D. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Surface-Buming Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke -Developed Index: 50 or less. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed and weather- tight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Lighting: Do not install wall covering until a permanent level of lighting is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering. C. Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommended by wall -covering manufacturer for full drying or curing. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1 • 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Wall -Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers Supplier. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wall coverings as scheduled on Drawings by the following: 1. MDC Wallcoverings; 1200 Arthur Avenue; Elk Grove Village, Illinois 60007; Contact, Kathy Kennedy; Telephone, (800) 621-4006, ext. 8508; Fax, (847) 437-4017; Order Placement, (800) 621-4006; Email, kkennedy@mdcwall.com. 2.2 WALL COVERINGS A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot. 2.3 VINYL WALL COVERING A. Vinyl Wall -Covering Standards: Provide mildew -resistant products complying with the following: 1. CFFA-W-101-D for Type II, Medium -Duty products. 2. ASTM F 793 for strippable wall coverings that qualify as Category II, Decorative with Medium Serviceability products. B. Width: 27 inches, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. C. Total Weight Not less than 13 ounces per yard. D. Backing: Osnaburg, drill, or non -woven fabric. 1. Fiber Content: Polyester. E. Repeat: Random, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. F. Stain -Resistant Coating: Provide material which is stain resistant to catsup, mustard, pickle juice, and coffee. Material shall be genuinely porous wallcovering. Non -porous wallcovering materials shall be porolated to combat mildew propagation. 1. Prolations shall be performed at an average of 150 holes per square inch of material, to render the material breathable. Prolated materials shall pass the test of an average of 3 to 4 cubic feet of air passing through the material per square feet per minute. Resulting holes shall be invisible to the naked eye. G. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Mildew -resistant, non -staining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application; as recommended in writing by wall -covering manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Primer/Sealer. Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Division 09 Section 'Interior Painting" and recommended in writing by wall -covering manufacturer for intended substrate. C. Seam Tape: As recommended in writing by wall -covering manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 2 • • B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects. 1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall -covering manufacturer. 3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding. D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fine sandpaper. E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. F. Acclimatize wall -covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not Tess than 24 hours before installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with wall -covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Cut wall -covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and comers. C. Install strips in same order as cut from roll. D. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage. E. Match pattem 72 inches above the finish floor. F. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside comers and 3 inches from inside comers unless a change of pattern or color exists at comer. No horizontal seams are permitted. G. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. H. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattem match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. B. Use leaning methods recommended in writing by wall -covering manufacturer. C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned. D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. END OF SECTION 097200 WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 3 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 098413 - FIXED SOUND -ABSORPTIVE PANELS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes back -mounted acoustical wall panels. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of panel edge, core material, and mounting indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For acoustical wall panels. Include mounting devices and details. 1. Field Measurements: Verify locations of acoustical wall panels by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C. Coordination Drawings: Show intersections with adjacent work. D. Samples: For each fabric and sample panels. E. Product certificates. F. Maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with the following surface-buming characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. Flame -Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials, fabrication, and installation. 1. Install mockups in the location and of the size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of acoustical wall panels that fail in performance, materials, or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failure in performance includes, but is not limited to, acoustical performance. 2. Failures in materials include, but are not limited to, fabric sagging, distorting, or releasing from panel edge; or warping of core. 3. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CORE MATERIALS A. Glass -Fiber Board: ASTM C 612, Type IA or Types IA and IB; density as specified, unfaced, dimensionally stable, molded rigid board, with maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. FIXED SOUND -ABSORPTIVE PANELS 098413 - 1 • • B. Mineral -Fiber Board: Maximum flame -spread and smoke -developed indexes of 15 and 5, respectively. C. Impact -Resistant, Acoustically Transparent, Copolymer Face -Sheet Layer for High -Abuse Applications: 1/16- to 1/8 -inch -thick layer of perforated, noncombustible, copolymer sheet laminated to face of core. 2.2 BACK -MOUNTED, EDGE -REINFORCED ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS WITH GLASS -FIBER BOARD CORE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Echo Eliminator, Acoustical Surfaces, Inc. B. Panel Construction: Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material laminated to front face, edges, and back border of dimensionally stable, rigid glass -or rock-fiber/slag-fiber board core; with edges chemically hardened or impact resistant and resilient to reinforce panel perimeter against warpage and damage. C. Nominal Core Density: 3 to 6 Ib/cu. ft. D. Facing Material: Fabric from same dye lot; color and pattern as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 1. Applied Treatments: Stain resistance. E. Nominal Core Thickness and Overall System NRC: 2 inches and not Tess than NRC 0.90, for Type A mounting per ASTM E 795. F. Panel Width: 24 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. G. Panel Height: Fabricated height as indicated on Drawings; mounting height as indicated on Drawings. H. Panel Edge Detail: Square. I. Comer Detail: Square to form continuous profile to match edge detail. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabric Facing: Stretched straight, on the grain, tight, square, and free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive, or other foreign matter. Applied with visible surfaces fully covered. B. Core -Face Layer. Evenly stretched over core face and edges and securely attached to core; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, sags. C. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Units: Plus or minus 1/16 inch for the following: 1. Thickness. 2. Edge straightness. 3. Overall length and width. 4. Squareness from comer to corner. D. Back -Mounting Devices: Concealed on backside of panel, recommended to support weight of panel, with base -support bracket system where recommended by manufacturer for additional support of panels, and as follows: 1. Adhesive. Use only adhesives that have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level and in alignment with other panels, faces flush, and scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. 1. Cut units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing material extended over cut edge to match uncut edge. Scribe acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly. FIXED SOUND -ABSORPTIVE PANELS 098413 - 2 • B. Anchor panels securely to supporting substrate. C. Match and level fabric pattern and grain among adjacent panels. D. Installation Tolerances: As follows: 1. Variation from Level and Plumb: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 2. Variation of Panel Joints from Hairline: Not more than 1/16 inch wide. E. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials. F. Clean panels with fabric facing, on completion of installation, to remove dust and according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Replace acoustical wall panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner before time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 098413 other foreign materials approved by Architect, FIXED SOUND -ABSORPTIVE PANELS 098413 - 3 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross- reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. E. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturers original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 1 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B_ Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures Tess than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Fumish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. ICI Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Fumish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions C. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 METAL PRIMERS A. Ferrous -Metal Primer. Factory -formulated rust -inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50WZ1: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not Tess than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not Tess than 3.0 mils. B. Galvanized Metal Primer. Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 4020-XXXX Devflex DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not Tess than 3.0 mils. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 2 2.4 FINISH COATS A. Exterior Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semi -gloss waterborne acrylic -latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; A-100 Latex Gloss A8 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex House & Trim Paint No. 170: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 2406-XXXX Dulux Professional Exterior 100 Percent Acrylic Semi -Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.3 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-900 Series SpeedHide Exterior House & Trim Semi -Gloss Acrylic Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, fumish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove machined surfaces and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface -applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. Ferrous Metal Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. D. Galvanized -Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. E. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. F. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 3 • 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the room finish schedule. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 5. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance of paint materials with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non -complying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 4 • • • B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop -primed items. 1. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust -inhibitive primer. a. Primer. Exterior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel. B. Galvanized Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior galvanized metal surfaces: 1. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer. Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior semi -gloss acrylic enamel END OF SECTION 099113 EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113 - 5 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Gypsum board. 3. Wood. 4. Cotton or canvas insulation covering. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this Section. 2. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of paint systems on exterior substrates. 3. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4_ Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross- reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. E. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1 • • • B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Fumish an additional 5 percent, but not Tess than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company. 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. ICI Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Fumish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions C. VOC Content of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Non -flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti -Corrosive and Anti -Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. D. Chemical Components of Field -Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti- corrosive and anti -rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2 • • g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di -n -butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2 -dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. I. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1 -trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride. E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Interior Gypsum Board Primer. Factory -formulated latex -based primer for interior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite 200 Latex Wall Primer B28W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not Tess than 1.2 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick -Drying Latex Sealer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS A. Interior Ferrous -Metal Primer. Factory -formulated quick -drying rust -inhibitive alkyd -based metal primer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Kem Kromik Universal Metal Primer B50NZ6/B50W21: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied al a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 4130-6130 Devshield Rust Penetrating Metal Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. B. Interior Zinc -Coated Metal Primer. Factory -formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; primer not required over this substrate. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi -Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt -Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not Tess than 3.0 mils. 2.5 WOOD PRIMERS A. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic -Enamel Finishes: Factory -formulated alkyd- or acrylic -latex -based interior wood primer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Classic Interior Primer B28W101 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 3210-1200 Ultra -Hide Aquacrylic GRIPPER Stain Killer Primer Sealer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3 • • • 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-855 SpeedHide Latex Enamel Undercoater. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 2.6 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory -formulated flat acrylic -emulsion latex paint for interior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 1200-(((( Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall and Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat -Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. B. Flat Latex -Emulsion Size: Factory -formulated flat latex -based interior paint. 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint B30W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorecraft Super Spec Latex Flat No. 275: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 1200-X((X Dulux Professional Velvet Matte Interior Flat Latex Wall and Trim Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat -Latex Paint: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. C. Interior Low -Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated eggshell acrylic -latex interior enamel. 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Egg -Shell Enamel B20W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Eggshell Enamel No. 274: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 1402-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Eggshell Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-400 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.25 mils. D. Interior Semi -Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory -formulated semi -gloss acrylic -latex enamel for interior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Interior Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel B31 W200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi -Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Paints; 14064000( Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi -Gloss Interior Wall and Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi -Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, fumish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4 • • • C. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. D. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Wood: 15 percent. 2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. 2. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible printers as required to produce paint systems indicated. C. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. 1. Blast steel surfaces clean as recommended by paint system manufacturer and according to SSPC- SP 6/NACE No. 3. 2. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. 3. Touch up bare areas and shop -applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non -petroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. E. Wood Substrates: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off. 3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. 4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. F. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth. G. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might impair bond of paints to substrates. H. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5 • • 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" incudes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or fumiture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, non -specular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field -finished casework to match exterior. 10. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet -back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. G. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Visible portions of intemal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. e. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. f. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6 • • 2. Electrical Work: a. Panelboards. b. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory -primed finish for field painting. H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no bum -through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non -complying -paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Con-ect damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer, use on ceilings. a. Primer. Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior flat acrylic paint. 2. Low -Luster Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer, use on walls. a. Primer. Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior low -luster acrylic enamel. 3. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi -gloss acrylic enamel. B. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over new interior wood surfaces: 1. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood undercoater. a. Primer. Interior wood primer for acrylic -enamel and semi -gloss alkyd -enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi -gloss acrylic enamel. INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7 • • • C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Interior ferrous -metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi -gloss acrylic enamel. D. Zinc Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc coated metal surfaces: 1. Semi -Gloss Acrylic -Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Interior zinc -coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semi -gloss acrylic enamel. E. All -Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas insulation covering: 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex -emulsion size. END OF SECTION 099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 099300 - STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of wood finishes on the following substrates: 1. Interior Substrates: a. Wood doors B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and application of standard paint systems on interior substrates. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit Samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square. 2. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Material List: An inclusive • list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross- reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. E. Qualification Data: For Applicator. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on benchmark samples. 1. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well -ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 1 • 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Quantity: Fumish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company 2. Benjamin Moore & Co. 3. ICI Paints. 4. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated. B. Stain Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.3 WOOD FILLERS A. Open -Grain Wood Filler. Factory -formulated paste wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; none recommended 2. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Paste Wood Filler, No. 238 3. ICI Paints; none required 4. PPG Architectural Finishes; none required 2.4 STAINS A. Wood Stain: Factory formulated alkyd -based penetrating wood stain for interior application applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterbome Oil Satin, A-48 Series 2. Benjamin Moore; Benwood Penetrating Stain No. 234 3. ICI Paints; 1700 -XXX WoodPride Interior Solventborne Wood Finishing Stain 4. PPG Architectural Finishes; 77-560 Rez Interior Semi -Transparent Oil Stain 2.5 VARNISHES A. Interior Waterbome Clear Satin Vamish: Factory -formulated clear satin acrylic -based polyurethane vamish applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Wood Classics Waterbome Polyurethane Satin, A-68 Series 2. Benjamin Moore; Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane No. 423, Satin 3. ICI Paints; 1802-0000 WoodPride Interior Waterbome Aquacrylic Satin Vamish 4. PPG Architectural Finishes; 77-49 Rez Satin Acrylic Clear Polyurethane STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Maximum Moisture Content of Wood Substrates: 15 percent when measured with an electronic moisture meter. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes. 3. Begin finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 4. Beginning application of finish system constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrate and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, and similar items already installed that are not to be finished. 1. After completing finish operations, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying finish or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. C. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. 1. Stain or seal wood to be finished in field immediately on delivery. Prime edges and faces of wood doors. 2. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of vamish or sealer immediately on delivery. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and fumiture same as similar exposed surfaces. B. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peal, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final finish coats. C. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color texture, and coverage. Remove and refinish work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when finishes are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample finish materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying finishes if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove non -complying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and refinish surfaces finished with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously finished surfaces if, on refinishing with complying materials, the two finishes are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 3 B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR WOOD -FINISH -SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Stained Woodwork: Stain Satin-Vamish Finish: Two finish coats of waterborne clear satin vamish over a sealer coat and waterborne interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. 1. Filler Coat: Open -grain wood filler 2. Satin Coat: Interior wood stain 3. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer 4. Finish Coats: Interior waterborne clear satin vamish END OF SECTION 099300 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 099300 - 4 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 099630 - ELASTOMERIC COATINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of elastomeric coatings to exterior masonry surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide elastomeric coating systems with the following properties as determined by test methods indicated: 1. Elongation: Not less than 100 percent with a tensile strength of 200 psi and not less than 88 percent recovery after 1 hour and 90 percent recovery after 24 hours when tested according to ASTM D 2370. 2. Accelerated Weathering: No cracking, peeling, blistering, chalking, or visual deterioration after 1000 hours when tested according to procedures in ASTM G 155. 3. Low -Temperature Flexibility: No crack formation when tested according to ASTM D 1737. 4. Moisture -Vapor Transmission: Not less than 2.0 perms according to ASTM D 1653. 5. Wind -Driven Rain Resistance: No water penetration according to procedures in FS TT -C-555. 6. Minimum Solids Content by Volume: Not less than 45 percent. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each elastomeric coating system specified. Include crack fillers, block fillers, and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross- reference the specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Technical information including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. 3. Certification by elastomeric coating manufacturer that products supplied comply with local VOC regulations. B. Samples: For each type of finish -coat material indicated. C. Qualification Data: For Applicator. D. Material Certificates: For each elastomeric coating material, signed by manufacturers. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests by a qualified testing agency for each elastomeric coating material indicating compliance of elastomeric coatings with requirements based on comprehensive testing within the last two years of current product formulations. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firrn or individual experienced in applying elastomeric coating systems similar in material and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 099630 - 1 • • B. Source Limitations: Obtain crack fillers primers and other undercoat materials from same manufacturer as finish coats. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturers original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Manufacturers stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 4. Thinning instructions (if permitted). 5. Application instructions. 6. Color name and number. 7. Handling instructions and precautions. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect elastomeric coating materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturers written instructions. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain temperature and conditions specified before starting or continuing coating operation. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Elastomeric Coating Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric coatings that fail within specified warranty period_ Failures include, but are not limited to, water penetration through the coating. B. Wan-anty Period for Elastomeric Coatings: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated in other Part 2 articles. B. Manufacturers Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. ICI Dulux Paint Centers, Inc. (ICI Dulux Paint). 2. Modac Products (Modac). 3. PPG Industries, Inc.; Pittsburgh Paints (Pittsburgh Paints). 4. Sonnebom, Div. of ChemRex, Inc. (Sonnebom). 2.2 ELASTOMERIC COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide cradle fillers, block fillers, primers, elastomeric finish -coat materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality elastomeric coating materials that are factory formulated, comply with requirements in FS TT -C-555, and are recommended by manufacturer for the application indicated. Material containers not displaying manufacturers product identification are not acceptable. ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 099630 - 2 • • 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturers proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Fumish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance of proposed substitutions. C. Colors and Textures: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. 2.3 CRACK FILLERS A. Crack Fillers: Factory -formulated acrylic emulsion crack fillers compatible with substrate and finish -coat materials indicated. 1. Crack Filler for Cracks up to 1/16 Inch: ICI Dulux Paint; Decra-Flex Smooth Brush Grade Elastomeric Patching Compound. Modac; Acra Lastic Brush Grade 115-004. Pittsburgh Paints; Buttering Grade Vinyl Sealant 236-2414. Sonnebom; Hydrocide 750 Brush Grade or Knife Grade Patching Compound. a. b. c. d. 2. Crack Filler for Cracks More Than 1/16 Inch: a. ICI Dulux Paint; Decra-Flex Smooth Knife Grade Elastomeric Patching Compound. b. Modac; Acra Lastic Knife Grade 115-002. c. Pittsburgh Paints; Regular Grade Vinyl Sealant 236-2397. d. Sonnebom; Hydrocide 750 Knife Grade Patching Compound. 2.4 PRIMERS A. Masonry Primer: Factory -formulated, alkali -resistant, acrylic -latex primer. 1. ICI Dulux Paint; Aquacrylic GRIPPER 3210 Acrylic Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2. Modac; Acrylic Latex Surface Conditioner 019-156: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 4.0 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; Speedhide Alkali Resistant Primer 6-603: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Sonnebom; Colorflex Sealer #751: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 2.5 ELASTOMERIC FINISH -COAT MATERIALS A. Smooth Elastomeric Finish: Smooth, factory -formulated, 100 percent acrylic elastomeric coating. 1. ICI Dulux Paint; Decra-Flex 2260-XXXX Smooth Elastomeric Coating System: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 mils. 2. Modac; Elastomeric Acrylic Coating, Smooth Texture 019-146: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 mils. 3. Pittsburgh Paints; Pitt -Flex Exterior Masonry Coating 100 Percent Acrylic Elastomeric 4-110: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 5.5 mils. 4. Sonnebom; Sonocoat Colorflex Waterproof Elastomeric Coating: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for coating application. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P4. 1. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of coating application will be construed as Applicators acceptance of surface conditions. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of total system for various substrates. On request, fumish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using coatings specified over substrates primed by others. ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 099630 - 3 • • 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, Tight fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be coated. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and coating. 1. After completing coating operations, reinstall items removed, using workers skilled in trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coating systems. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. Schedule cleaning and coating application so dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according to manufacturer's written instructions for particular substrate conditions and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Prepare masonry surfaces to receive elastomeric coatings. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, release agents, grease, oils, and similar impediments to good adhesion by water blasting followed by a clear water rinse. a. Remove mildew and neutralize surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions before patching materials are applied. b. Roughen as required to remove glaze. Use abrasive blast -leaning methods if recommended by coating manufacturer. c. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be coated by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause finish paint to blister and bum, correct this condition before application. Do not apply coatings over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Crack Repair. Fill cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions before coating surfaces. 4. Deep Hairline Cracks: Remove dust and dirt from around cracks. Remove mildew by sterilizing before filling. Apply manufacturer's recommended primer to cracks before patching. If shrinkage occurs after applying crack filler, apply additional filler material to cracks before initial application of elastomeric coatings. a. Cracks up to 1/16 Inch: Clean surface around cracks. Apply crack filler primer penetrating cracks as deeply as possible, overflowing crack 2 inches on each side. When crack filler primer is dry, apply manufacturer's recommended sealant, forced well into cracks using a brush, putty knife, or trowel. Smooth edges of primed area around cracks. Allow for sealant shrinkage when applying. b. Cracks up to 3/8 Inch: Open cracks to 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide and 1/8 inch deep. Clean cracks and surrounding area removing dust, dirt, and other impurities. Apply crack filler primer recommended by manufacturer with a brush to obtain uniform coverage and spread approximately 2 inches on each side of cracks. Fill cracks with manufacturer's recommended crack filler applied with a putty knife or trowel, and allow for shrinkage. If excessive shrinkage occurs, reapply crack filler. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare materials according to coating manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying elastomeric coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. If surface film forms, do not stir film into material. If necessary, remove film and strain coating material before using. 3. If manufacturer permits thinning, use only thinners recommended by manufacturer, and only within recommended limits. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply elastomeric coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in coating schedule. 2. Do not paint over conditions detrimental to formation of a durable coating film, such as dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, and scuffed surfaces. 3. Provide finish coats compatible with primers used. ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 099630 - 4 0 • B. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. C. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Number of coats and film thickness required are same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by manufacturer_ 2. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until coating film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Ensure that surfaces, including edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until coating has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D. Application Procedures: Apply elastomeric coatings by brush, roller, or spray according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for material being applied. 2. Rollers: Use professional -quality quick -release rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool covers with a 1 to 1-1/4 inch nap as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Wherever spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush -applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment, building up film thickness of two coats in one pass. F. Prime Coats: If recommended by manufacturer, apply a primer to material being coated before applying finish coats. G. Brush Application: Brush out and work brush coats into surfaces in an even film. Eliminate cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Neatly draw glass lines and color breaks. Roller Application: Keep cover wet at all times; do not dry roll. Work in sections. Lay on required amount of material, working material into grooves and rough areas; then level material, working it into surface. I. Spray Application: Use spray equipment for application only when permitted by manufacturer's written instructions and authorities having jurisdiction. J. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work not complying with specified requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during coating operations: 1. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to sample coating material being used. Samples of material delivered to Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by Owner. a. Elongation. b. Accelerated weathering. c. Low-temperature flexibility. d. Moisture -vapor transmission. e. Wind -driven rain resistance. f. Minimum solids content by volume. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop coating application if test results show materials being used do not comply with requirements. Contractor shall remove non -complying materials from Project site, pay for testing, and recoat surfaces coated with rejected materials. If necessary, Contractor may be required to remove rejected materials from previously coated surfaces if, on recoating with specified materials, the two coatings are not compatible. ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 099630 - 5 • • 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. 1. After completing coating work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods, being careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades from damage whether being coated or not. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and recoating as approved by Architect. Leave in an undamaged condition. B. Provide 'Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing coating operations. C. After construction activities of other trades are complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1. 3.7 COATING SCHEDULE A. Masonry: Provide the following elastomeric coating systems over exterior masonry surfaces: 1. Smooth Elastomeric Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer. Masonry primer. 2. Finish Coats: Smooth elastomeric finish END OF SECTION 099630 ELASTOMERIC COATINGS 099630 - 6 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Panel signs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 2. Division 23 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, for HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Division 26 Sections for electrical service and connections for illuminated signs. 4. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and electrical equipment. 5. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs. 1.3 DEFINITIONS and nameplates nameplates for A. ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell -cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing). SIGNAGE 101400 - 1 • • 2.2 PANEL SIGNS A. Manufacturers Supplier. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hollow metal doors and frames as scheduled on Drawings by the following: 1. Forrest Perma-Sign Company, Inc.; 9292 First Street, New Rochelle, New York 10802; Telephone, (800) 214-8765, www.forrestpermasigns.com B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from comer to comer, complying with the following requirements: 1. Acrylic Sheet: 0.080 inch thick. 2. Laminated Sheet: High-pressure engraved stock with face laminated to acrylic core as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3. Laminated, Etched Photopolymer. Raised graphics with Braille 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and laminated to acrylic back. 4. Edge Condition: Square cut. 5. Comer Condition: Square. 6. Mounting: Framed. a. Wall mounted with concealed anchors. b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 7. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 8. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with contrasting colors. C. Panel Sign Frames: 1. Acrylic Plastic: a. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. b. Profile: Square. c. Comer Condition: Square. d. Mounting: Wall mounted with concealed anchors. D. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols complying with ADA -ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square -cut edges free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape. 1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet. 2. Raised -Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch. E. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. 1. Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. F. Panel Sign Schedule: 1. Sign Type: Toilet Rooms a. Sign Size: 8° x 8" b. Background Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range c. Panel Sign/Frame: Cast acrylic sheet 1) Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. d. Text/Message: Fixed. 1) Character Size: According to ADA requirements or of authorities having jurisdiction, which ever requirements are more stringent. 2) Character Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3) Copy: Raised 4) Text: According to ADA requirements or of authorities having jurisdiction, which ever requirements are more stringent. 5) Character Style: Helvetica 2. Sign Type: Room Identification a. Sign Size: 3° x 6 " b. Background Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range c. Panel Sign/Frame: Cast acrylic sheet 1) Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. d. Text/Message: Fixed. SIGNAGE 101400 - 2 0 • 1) Character Size: According to ADA requirements or of authorities having jurisdiction, which ever requirements are more stringent. 2) Character Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3) Copy: Tactile and Braille 4) Text: Room name. 5) Character Style: Helvetica 3. Sign Type: Occupancy a. Sign Size: 3° x 12° b. Background Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range c. Panel Sign/Frame: Cast acrylic sheet 1) Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. d. Text/Message: Fixed. 1) Character Size: According to ADA requirements or of authorities having jurisdiction, which ever requirements are more stringent. 2) Character Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. 3) Copy: Tactile and Braille 4) Text: Maximum occupancy Toad 5) Character Style: Helvetica 4. Sign Type: Accessible Entrance a. Sign Size: 4'/° x 4'/° b. Background Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range c. Panel Sign/Frame: Cast acrylic sheet 1) Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range. d. Text/Message: Fixed. 1) Character Size: According to ADA requirements or of authorities having jurisdiction, which ever requirements are more stringent. 2) Character Finish/Color. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 3) Copy: Tactile and Braille 4) Text: Maximum occupancy load 5) Character Style: Helvetica 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous -metal or hot -dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion -bolt devices for drilled -in-place anchors. Fumish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet For copy, background, and frame colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. SIGNAGE 101400 - 3 0 • ie PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of - door. B. Wall -Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Silicone -Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl -covered surfaces. 2. Mechanical Fasteners: Use non -removable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. END OF SECTION 101400 SIGNAGE 101400 - 4 0 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Phenolic -core toilet compartments configured as toilet enclosures and urinal screens. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for blocking. 2. Division 10 Section "Toilet Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars, and similar accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For toilet compartments. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Show locations of cutouts for compartment -mounted toilet accessories. 2. Show locations of reinforcements for compartment -mounted grab bars. 3. Show locations of centerlines of toilet fixtures. C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's standard sizes unless otherwise indicated: 1. Each type of material, color, and finish required for units, prepared on 6 -inch square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work. 2. Each type of hardware and accessory. D. Product Certificates: For each type of toilet compartment, from manufacturer. E. Maintenance Data: For toilet compartments to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements in GSA's CID -A -A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete." B. Surface-Buming Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, or another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 75 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities" and ICC/ANSI A117.1 for toilet compartments designated as accessible. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of toilet fixtures, walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 -1 • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221. B. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher -leveled standard of flatness. C. Stainless -Steel Castings: ASTM A 743. 2.2 PHENOLIC -CORE UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Accurate Partitions Corporation. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation; Mills Partitions. 4. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 5. Knickerbocker Partition Corporation. B. Toilet -Enclosure Style: Overhead braced. C. Urinal -Screen Style: Wall hung. D. Door, Panel, and Pilaster Construction: Solid phenolic -core panel material with melamine facing on both sides fused to substrate during panel manufacture (not separately laminated), and with eased and polished edges and no-sightline system. Provide minimum 3/4 -inch thick doors and pilasters and minimum 1/2 -inch thick panels. E. Pilaster Shoes: Fabricated from stainless-steel sheet, not less than 0.031 -inch nominal thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. F. Urinal -Screen Post: Manufacturer's standard post design of monolithic phenolic urinal screen cut out at bottom to form a post; with shoe matching that on the pilaster. G. Brackets (Fittings): 1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U -brackets, stainless steel. 2. Full -Height (Continuous) Type: Manufacturers standard design; stainless steel. H. Phenolic -Panel Finish: 1. Facing Sheet Finish: One color and pattern in each room. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturers full range, with manufacturers standard through -color core matching face sheet. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or partially open position. 3. Latch and Keeper. Manufacturer's standard recessed latch unit designed for emergency access and with combination rubber -faced door strike and keeper. Provide units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments designated as accessible. 4. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber -tipped bumper, sized to prevent in -swinging door from hitting compartment -mounted accessories. 5. Door Bumper. Manufacturers standard rubber -tipped bumper at out -swinging doors. 6. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out -swinging doors that complies with regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments designated as accessible. B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded -aluminum head rail with anti -grip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish. TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 2 0 • C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome -plated steel or brass, finished to match the items they are securing, with theft -resistant -type heads. Provide sex - type bolts for through -bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use stainless steel, hot -dip galvanized steel, or other rust -resistant, protective -coated steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Overhead -Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant supports, leveling mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism. B. Urinal -Screen Posts: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion -resistant anchoring assemblies with leveling adjustment at bottoms of posts. Provide shoes at posts to conceal anchorage. C. Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24 -inch wide, in -swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36 -inch wide, out -swinging doors with a minimum 32 -inch wide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Maximum Clearances: a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch. b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch. 2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with no fewer than three brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel. a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls. B. Overhead -Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Set pilasters with anchors penetrating not less than 1-3/4 inches into structural floor unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written instructions. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with no fewer than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels, and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. C. Urinal Screens: Attach with anchoring devices to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb, rigid, and secured to resist lateral impact. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to hardware manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in -swinging doors to hold doors open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out -swinging doors to retum doors to fully closed position. END OF SECTION 102113 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 102113 - 3 0 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 102600 - WALL PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Comer guards. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: For exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Comer Guards: 12 inches long. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain impact -resistant wall -protection units through one source from a single manufacturer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store wall -protection units in original undamaged packages and containers inside well -ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Fumish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Comer -Guards: Full-size stainless steel comer guards matching length and finish texture of units installed. Provide two units. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless -Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240. B. Fasteners: Non-magnetic stainless-steel, or other non -corrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with stainless steel comer guards being fastened. Use security -type fasteners where exposed to view. 2.2 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface -Mounted, Metal Comer Guards: Fabricated from 1 -piece, formed or extruded metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135 -degree tum to match wall condition. 1. Manufacturers: a. ARDEN Architectural Specialties, Inc. b. Balco, Inc. c. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation. e. Pawling Corporation. 2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304. a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0625 inch. b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4. WALL PROTECTION 102600 - 1 • • 3. Wing Size: Nominal 4 by 4 inches. 4. Comer Radius: 1/8 inch. 5. Mounting: Flat -head, countersunk screws through factory -drilled mounting holes. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate wall -protection units to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, and member sizes. B. Provide surfaces free of dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings flush and smooth. 2.4 METAL FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. 2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directionally textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece. B. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. C. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Examine walls to which wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact -resistant wall -protection system components. B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install wall -protection comer guards plumb and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with stains, dents, or other defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1. Install impact -resistant wall -protection units in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION 102600 WALL PROTECTION 102600 - 2 1 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 102800 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Public -use washroom accessories. 2. Warm -air dryers. 3. Childcare accessories. 4. Under -lavatory guards. 5. Custodial accessories. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section 'Tiling" for ceramic toilet accessories. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty. B. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify products using designations indicated on "Restroom Accessory Schedule" on Drawings. C. Maintenance Data: For toilet accessories to include in maintenance manuals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1 1 • • PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312 -inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper -and -theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed. C. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear -glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick. D. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene resin formulation. 2.2 PUBLIC -USE WASHROOM ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated as manufactured by Bradley Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Manufacturers Supplier. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet accessories as listed in the "Restroom Accessory Schedule" on Drawings by the following: 1. Universal Manufacturing Company, Inc.; 5366 Crestview Road; Memphis, Tennessee 38134; Contact, Ted Tummins; Telephone, (901) 458-5881; Fax, (901) 324-7115; Order Placement, (800) 821-1414. C. Toilet Tissue (Roll) Dispenser, Restroom Accessory Item "2": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradely; #5412. 2. Description: Double -roll dispenser. 3. Mounting: Recessed. 4. Operation: Noncontrol delivery with theft -resistant spindle. 5. Capacity: Designed for 5 -inch diameter tissue rolls. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). D. Paper Towel (Folded) Dispenser, Restroom Accessory Item "4B": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley; #2441. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Minimum Capacity: 350 C -fold or 475 multifold towels. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Lockset: Tumbler type. E. Waste Receptacle; Restroom Accessory Item "4B": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley; #3251. 2. Mounting: Self-closing disposal -opening cover, recessed. 3. Minimum Capacity: 2.8 gallon capacity. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 5. Liner. Reusable vinyl liner. 6. Lockset: Tumbler type for waste -receptacle. F. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle; Restroom Accessory Item "4C": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley; #2251. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C -fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Recessed. a. Designed for nominal 4 -inch wall depth. 4. Minimum Towel -Dispenser Capacity: 250 C -fold or 450 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste -Receptacle Capacity: 5.3 gallon capacity. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner. Reusable, vinyl waste -receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel -dispenser compartment and waste receptacle. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2 • • • G. Liquid -Soap Dispenser, Restroom Accessory Item "6A°: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley, #6326-68 (Universal Manufacturing Co.) 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Deck mounted on countertop. 4. Capacity: 32 ounces. 5. Materials: Stainless Steel piston and spout H. Liquid -Soap Dispenser, Restroom Accessory Item "6B": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley, #6542 (Universal Manufacturing Co.) 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in liquid or lotion form. 3. Mounting: Horizontally oriented, wall mounted. 4. Capacity: 40 ounces. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). Grab Bar, Restroom Accessory Item "1A° "1B° and "1C": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley, #812-001-42, #812-001-36, or #812-001-24 (Universal Manufacturing Co.) 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick. a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip -resistant texture in grip area. 4. Outside Diameter. 1-1/2 inches]. 5. Configuration and Length: Refer to Drawings for locations. J. Sanitary -Napkin Disposal Unit; Restroom Accessory Item "3": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradely; #4731-15. 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Door or Cover. Self-closing disposal -opening cover and hinged face panel with tumbler Iockset]. 4. Receptacle: Removable. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). K. Mirror Unit; Restroom Accessory Item"5": 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley, #781 (Universal Manufacturing Co.) a. Frame: Stainless-steel channel. 2. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft -resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. One-piece, galvanized steel, wall -hanger device with spring -action locking mechanism to hold mirror unit in position with no exposed screws or bolts. b. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 3. Size: 24 by 36 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 2.3 WARM -AIR DRYERS A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated as manufactured by World Dryer Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Dryer, Inc. 3. American Specialties, Inc. 4. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 5. Bradley Corporation. B. Warm -Air Dryer, Restroom Accessory Item "4A°: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: World Dryer Corporation; RA5Q-974 (Universal Manufacturing Co.) 2. Mounting: Recessed. 3. Operation: Touch -button activated with timed power cut-off switch. a. Operation Time: 30 to 40 seconds. 4. Cover Material and Finish: Steel, with white enamel finish. 5. Electrical Requirements: 115 V, 20 A, 2300 W. 2.4 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated as manufactured by Koala Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. American Infant Care Products Inc. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3 • • • 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Brocar Products, Inc. 4. Safe -Strap Company, Inc. B. Diaper -Changing Station; Restroom Accessory Item"7°: 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Koala Corporation; Baby Changing Table KB100-MDTA. 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child -protection strap. a. Engineered to support a minimum of 250 -Ib static load when opened. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches from wall when closed. 4. Operation: By pneumatic shock -absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: High-density polyethylene with plastic laminate insert in color selected by Architect. 6. Liner Dispenser. Built in. 2.5 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Plumberex Specialty Products, Inc. 2. TCI Products. 3. Truebro, Inc. B. Under -Lavatory Guard: 1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies that prevent direct contact with and bums from piping, and allow service access without removing coverings. 2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded -plastic, white. 2.6 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES A. Basis -of -Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated as manufactured by Bradley Corporation. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. B. Mop and Broom Holder. 1. Basis -of -Design Product: Bradley; #9983. 2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf. 3. Length: 30 inches. 4. Hooks: Two. 5. Mop/Broom Holders: Three, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). a. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05 -inch thick stainless steel. b. Rod: Approximately 1/4 -inch diameter stainless steel. 2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion -resistant backing plates. B. Keys: Provide universal keys for intemal access to accessories for servicing and re -supplying. Provide minimum of six (6) keys to Area Construction Manager. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4 • • • B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward Toad of at least 250 Ibf, when tested according to method in ASTM F 446. 3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items. B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings. C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations. END OF SECTION 102800 TOILET ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Mechanical sleeve seals. 5. Sleeves. 6. Escutcheons. 7. Grout. 8. Demolition. 9. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections. 10. Painting and finishing. 11. Concrete bases. 12. Supports and anchorages. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in chases. E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters. F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials: 1. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PE: Polyethylene plastic. 4. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials: 1. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. 2. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Transition fittings. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 1 4. Escutcheons. B. Welding certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code- -Steel." B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and that certification is current. C. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics may be fumished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory -applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured -in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames." PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods. B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory -threaded pipe and pipe fittings. 2.3 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below. B. Pipe -Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos -free, 1/8 -inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 2 r a. Full -Face Type: For flat -face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast -bronze flanges. b. Narrow -Face Type: For raised -face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full -face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. D. Plastic, Pipe -Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper -phosphorus alloys for general -duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated. G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping: 1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138. I. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer. 2.4 TRANSITION FITTINGS A. AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div. c. Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated; Pipe Products Div. d. JCM Industries. e. Smith -Blair, Inc. f. Viking Johnson. 2. Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller. Manufactured fitting or coupling. 3. Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger. AWWA C219, metal sleeve -type coupling. 4. Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting. B. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent -cement -joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Eslon Thermoplastics. C. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent -cement -joint end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Thompson Plastics, Inc. D. Plastic -to -Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP -107, CPVC four-part union. Include brass end, solvent - cement -joint end, rubber 0 -ring, and union nut. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. NIBCO INC. b. NIBCO, Inc.; Chemtrol Div. E. Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173 with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion -resistant metal band on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Femco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Company. d. Plastic Oddities, Inc. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 3 • 2.5 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder -joint, plain, or weld -neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: Factory -fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Epco Sales, Inc. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. c. Zum Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory -fabricated, companion -flange assembly, for 150 or 300 psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Epco Sales, Inc. b. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. E. Dielectric -Flange Kits: Companion -flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, full -face- or ring - type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Central Plastics Company. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures. F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized -steel coupling with inert and non -corrosive, thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corp. G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non -corrosive, thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Perfection Corp. b. Precision Plumbing Products, Inc. c. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc. d. Victaulic Co. of America. 2.6 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.7 SLEEVES A. Galvanized -Steel Sheet: 0.0239 -inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 4 • B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends. C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated 'wall pipe" equivalent to ductile -iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated. D. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing. 1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws. E. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms. F. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40. 2.8 ESCUTCHEONS A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening. B. One -Piece, Deep-Pattem Type: Deep -drawn, box -shaped brass with polished chrome -plated finish. C. One -Piece, Cast -Brass Type: With set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. D. Split -Casting, Cast -Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw. 1. Finish: Polished chrome -plated. E. One -Piece, Stamped -Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome -plated finish. F. Split -Plate, Stamped -Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chrome -plated finish. G. One -Piece, Floor -Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate. H. Split -Casting, Floor -Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw. 2.9 GROUT A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non -shrink and non-metallic, dry hydraulic -cement grout. 1. Characteristics: Post -hardening, volume -adjusting, non -staining, non -corrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping to permit valve servicing. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 5 G. Install piping at indicated slopes. H. Install piping free of sags and bends. I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. J. Install piping to allow application of insulation. K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following: 1. New Piping: a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattem type. b. Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped -steel type with spring dips. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast -brass type with polished chrome -plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped -steel type with concealed or exposed -rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped -steel type with set screw or spring clips. g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor -plate type. 2. Existing Piping: Use the following: a. Chrome -Plated Piping: Split -casting, cast -brass type with chrome -plated finish. b. Insulated Piping: Split -plate, stamped -steel type with concealed hinge and spring clips. c. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split -casting, cast -brass type with chrome -plated finish. d. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split -casting, cast -brass type with chrome -plated finish. e. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split -plate, stamped -steel type with concealed or exposed -rivet hinge and set screw or spring dips. f. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split -plate, stamped -steel type with set screw or spring clips. g. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split -casting, floor -plate type. M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum -board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs. 1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. 2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4 -inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum -board partitions. c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing. 1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout. 4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. N. Aboveground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular dear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 6 inches in diameter. 2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 6 inches and larger in diameter. 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 6 O. Underground, Exterior -Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals- Select sleeve size to allow for 1 -inch annular dear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. P. Fire -Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for materials. Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing -in. R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing -in requirements. 3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper -phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8. F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to extemal pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article. H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. I. Plastic Piping Solvent -Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe -handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. 2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846 Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other -than -schedule -number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855. 5. PVC Non -pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Non -pressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138 Appendix. J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139. K. Plastic Non -pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212. L. PE Piping Heat -Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with dean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. Plain -End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 7 2. Plain -End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion. M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 PIPING CONNECTIONS A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment. 3. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. 3.4 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope. E. Coordinate locations with all other trades before installing. 3.5 PAINTING A. Painting of plumbing systems, equipment, and components is specified in Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting." B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory -painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish. 3.6 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES A. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural steel. B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and equipment. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1. 3.7 GROUTING A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout. D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout. E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases. F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 8 G. Place grout around anchors. H. Cure placed grout. END OF SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500 - 9 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220513 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel -cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in plumbing equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor. 1.15. D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque. 1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding. 2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed. E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. F. Rotor. Random -wound, squirrel cage. G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 1 • I. Insulation: Class F. J. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger. NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger, rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Reduced -Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box, suited to control method. B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture -resistant insulation vamish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse -width modulated inverters. 2. Energy- and Premium -Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation. 3. Inverter -Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. C. Severe -Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent -split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. B. Multispeed Motors: Variable -torque, permanent -split -capacitor type. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller. Shaded -pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermal -protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature retums to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Applicable END OF SECTION 220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 220513 - 2 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220516 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal -bellows expansion joints. 2. Rubber expansion joints. 3. Flexible -hose expansion joints. 4. Pipe bends and loops. 5. Alignment guides and anchors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BR: Butyl rubber. B. Buna-N: Nitrile rubber. C. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. D. CSM: Chlorosulfonyl-polyethylene rubber. E. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. F. NR: Natural rubber. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures. B. Capability: Products shall absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Welding certificates. C. Product Certificates: For each type of pipe expansion joint, signed by product manufacturer. D. Maintenance Data: For pipe expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. Steel Shapes and Plates: AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. Welding to Piping: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 1 • • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EXPANSION JOINTS A. Metal -Bellows Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1120, circular -corrugated -bellows type with extemal tie rods. 1. Metal -Bellows Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Single or multiple ply phosphor -bronze bellows, copper pipe end connections, and brass shrouds. 2. Metal -Bellows Expansion Joints for Stainless -Steel Waterway: Single -ply stainless-steel bellows, stainless -steel -pipe end connections, and steel shroud. 3. Metal -Bellows Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single or multiple ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe end connections, and carbon -steel shroud. 4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Configuration: Single- or double -bellows type unless otherwise indicated. 6. End Connections: Flanged or weld. B. Rubber Expansion Joints: ASTM F 1123, fabric -reinforced rubber with external control rods and complying with FSA's 'Technical Handbook: Non -Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors." 1 Arch Type: Single or multiple arches. 2. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres. a. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F. b. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F. c. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Ratings for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F. 3. Material: EPDM or NR. 4. End Connections: Full-faced, integral, steel flanges with steel retaining rings. C. Flexible -Hose Expansion Joints: Manufactured assembly with two flexible -metal -hose legs joined by long - radius, 180 -degree retum bend or center section of flexible hose; with inlet and outlet elbow fittings, corrugated -metal inner hoses, and braided outer sheaths. 1. Flexible -Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper -alloy fittings with solder -joint end connections. a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Bronze hoses and single -braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel hoses and single -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70 deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 2. Flexible -Hose Expansion Joints for Copper Piping: Copper -alloy fittings with solder -joint end connections. a. NPS 2 and Smaller. Bronze hoses and double -braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 500 psig at 450 deg F ratings. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Stainless-steel hoses and double -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70 deg F and 315 psig at 450 deg F ratings. 3. Flexible -Hose Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon -steel fittings with threaded end connections for NPS 2 and smaller and flanged end connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. a. NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel hoses and single -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel hoses and single -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70 deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F ratings. c. NPS 8 to NPS 12: Stainless-steel hoses and single -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 125 psig at 70 deg F and 90 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 4. Flexible -Hose Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Carbon -steel fittings with threaded end connections for NPS 2 and smaller and flanged end connections for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. a. NPS 2 and Smaller. Stainless-steel hoses and double -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 515 psig at 600 deg F ratings. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel hoses and double -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 275 psig at 70 deg F and 200 psig at 600 deg F ratings. c. NPS 8 and Larger. Stainless-steel hoses and double -braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70 deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings. 2.2 ALIGNMENT GUIDES A. Description: Steel, factory fabricated, with bolted two -section outer cylinder and base for alignment of piping and two -section guiding spider for bolting to pipe. 2.3 MATERIALS FOR ANCHORS A. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36. EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 2 B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel, hex head. C. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers. D. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert -wedge -type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. 1. Stud: Threaded, zinc -coated carbon steel. 2. Expansion Plug: Zinc -coated steel. 3. Washer and Nut: Zinc -coated steel. E. Chemical Fasteners: Insert -type -stud bonding system anchor for use with hardened portland cement concrete, and tension and shear capacities appropriate for application. 1. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881, Type IV, Grade 3, 2 -component epoxy resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be installed. 2. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc -coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Washer and Nut: Zinc -coated steel. F. Concrete: Portland cement mix, 3000 psi minimum. Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast - in -Place Concrete" for formwork, reinforcement, and concrete. G. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, non -shrink, non-metallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non -staining, non -corrosive, and non-gaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXPANSION -JOINT INSTALLATION A. Install manufactured, nonmetallic expansion joints according to FSA's 'Technical Handbook: Non -Metallic Expansion Joints and Flexible Pipe Connectors." B. Install expansion joints of sizes matching size of piping in which they are installed. C. Install alignment guides to allow expansion and to avoid end -loading and torsional stress. 3.2 PIPE BEND AND LOOP INSTALLATION A. Install pipe bends and loops cold -sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or compression produced during anticipated change in temperature. B. Attach pipe bends and loops to anchors. 1. Steel Anchors: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." 2. Concrete Anchors: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 SWING CONNECTIONS A. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings, including tee in main. B. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in riser. C. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings, including tee in main. 3.4 ALIGNMENT -GUIDE INSTALLATION A. Install guides on piping adjoining pipe expansion fittings and loops. B. Attach guides to pipe and secure to building structure. EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 3 r 3.5 ANCHOR INSTALLATION A. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1. C. Construct concrete anchors of poured -in-place concrete of dimensions indicated and include embedded fasteners. D. Install pipe anchors according to expansion -joint manufacturer's written instructions if expansion joints are indicated. E. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for expansion fittings, guides, and anchors installed on or in concrete. END OF SECTION 220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220516 - 4 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220519 - METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermometers. 2. Gages. 3. Test plugs. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 Section "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic and fire -protection water service meters outside the building. 2. Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping" for domestic and fire -protection water service meters inside the building. 3. Division 23 Section "Facility Natural -Gas Piping" for gas meters. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CR: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic rubber. B. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated; include performance curves. B. Shop Drawings: Schedule for thermometers and gages indicating manufacturer's number, scale range, and location for each. C. Product Certificates: For each type of thermometer and gage, signed by product manufacturer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL -CASE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Case: Die-cast aluminum or brass, 7 inches long. B. Tube: Red or blue reading, organic -liquid filled, with magnifying lens. C. Tube Background: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. D. Window: Glass or plastic. E. Connector. Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device. F. Stem: Copper -plated steel, aluminum, or brass for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 1 2.2 PLASTIC -CASE, LIQUID -IN -GLASS THERMOMETERS A. Case: Plastic, 7 inches long. B. Tube: Red or blue reading, mercury or organic -liquid filled, with magnifying Tens. C. Tube Background: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. D. Window: Glass or plastic. E. Connector. Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device. F. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. G. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.3 DIRECT -MOUNTING, VAPOR ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. B. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. C. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer. D. Dial: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. E. Pointer. Red or other dark -color metal. F. Window: Glass or plastic. G. Ring: Metal or plastic. H. Connector. Adjustable type, 180 degrees in vertical plane, 360 degrees in horizontal plane, with locking device. I. Thermal System: Liquid- or mercury -filled bulb in copper -plated steel, aluminum, or brass stem for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. J. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.4 REMOTE -MOUNTING, VAPOR -ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4 -1/2 -inch diameter with holes for panel mounting. B. Element: Bourdon tube or other type of pressure element. C. Movement: Mechanical, connecting element and pointer. D. Dial: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. E. Pointer. Red or other dark -color metal. F. Window: Glass or plastic. G. Ring: Brass. H. Connector. Bottom union type. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 2 I. Thermal System: Liquid or mercury -filled bulb in copper -plated thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. J. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale range. 2.5 BIMETALLIC -ACTUATED DIAL THERMOMETERS A. Description: Direct -mounting, bimetallic -actuated dial thermometers complying with ASME B40.3. B. Case: Dry type, stainless steel with 3 -inch diameter. C. Element: Bimetal coil. D. Dial: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. E. Pointer. Red or other dark -color metal. F. Window: Glass or plastic. G. Ring: Stainless steel. H. Connector. Adjustable angle type. I. Stem: Metal, for thermowell installation and of length to suit installation. J. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range or plus or minus 1 scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range. 2.6 THERMOWELLS A. Description: Pressure -tight, socket -type metal fitting made for insertion into piping and of type, diameter, and length required to hold thermometer. 2.7 PRESSURE GAGES A. Direct -Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: Indicating -dial type complying with ASME B40.100. 1. Case: Dry type, metal or plastic, 4 -1/2 -inch diameter. 2. Pressure -Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom -outlet type unless back -outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer. Red or other dark -color metal. 7. Window. Glass or plastic. 8. Ring: Metal or plastic. 9. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half scale. 10. Vacuum -Pressure Range: 30 -in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. steel, aluminum, or brass stem for division to maximum of 1.5 percent of B. Remote -Mounting, Dial -Type Pressure Gages: ASME B40.100, indicating -dial type. 1. Case: Dry type, drawn steel or cast aluminum, 4 -1/2 -inch diameter with holes for panel mounting. 2. Pressure -Element Assembly: Bourdon tube, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Pressure Connection: Brass, NPS 1/4, bottom -outlet type unless back -outlet type is indicated. 4. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer. 5. Dial: Satin -faced, non -reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings. 6. Pointer. Red or other dark -color metal. 7. Window. Glass or plastic. 8. Ring: Metal or plastic. 9. Accuracy: Grade B, plus or minus 2 percent of middle half scale. 10. Vacuum -Pressure Range: 30 -in. Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 11. Range for Fluids under Pressure: Two times operating pressure. C. Pressure -Gage Fittings: METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 3 1. Valves: NPS 1/4 brass or stainless-steel needle type. 2. Snubbers: ASME B40.5, NPS 1/4 brass bushing with corrosion -resistant, porous -metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. 2.8 TEST PLUGS A. Description: Corrosion -resistant brass or stainless-steel body with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap, with extended stem for units to be installed in insulated piping. B. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F. C. Core Inserts: One or two self-sealing rubber valves. 1. Insert material for water service at 20 to 200 deg F shall be CR. 2. Insert material for water service at minus 30 to plus 275 deg F shall be EPDM. D. Test Kit: Fumish one test kit(s) containing one pressure gage and adaptor, two thermometer(s), and carrying case. Pressure gage, adapter probes, and thermometer sensing elements shall be of diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping. 1. Pressure Gage: Small bourdon-tube insertion type with 2- to 3 -inch diameter dial and probe. Dial range shall be 0 to 200 psig. 2. Low -Range Thermometer. Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2 -inch diameter dial and tapered - end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 25 to 125 deg F. 3. High -Range Thermometer. Small bimetallic insertion type with 1- to 2 -inch diameter dial and tapered -end sensing element. Dial ranges shall be 0 to 220 deg F. 4. Carrying case shall have formed instrument padding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 THERMOMETER APPLICATIONS A. Install direct -mounting, vapor -actuated dial thermometers in the outlet of each domestic, hot-water storage tank. B. Install dry -case -type, vapor actuated dial thermometers at suction and discharge of each pump. C. Provide the following temperature ranges for thermometers: 1. Domestic Hot Water. 30 to 180 deg F, with 2 -degree scale divisions. 2. Domestic Cold Water. 0 to 100 deg F, with 2 -degree scale divisions. 3.2 GAGE APPLICATIONS A. Install dry -case -type pressure gages for discharge of each pressure -reducing valve. B. Install dry -case -type pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump. 3.3 INSTALLATIONS A. Install direct -mounting thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. B. Install remote -mounting dial thermometers on panel, with tubing connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length. C. Install thermowells with socket extending to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. D. Install direct -mounting pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at most readable position. E. Install remote -mounting pressure gages on panel. F. Install needle -valve and snubber fitting in piping for each pressure gage. G. Install test plugs in tees in piping. METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 4 H. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions. I. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable indicators in accessible locations. J. Install thermometers and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance for thermometers, gages, machines, and equipment. K. Adjust faces of thermometers and gages to proper angle for best visibility. END OF SECTION 220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220519 - 5 • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220523 - GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Incudes: 1. Bronze angle valves. 2. Brass ball valves. 3. Bronze ball valves. 4. Iron ball valves. 5. Iron, single -flange butterfly valves. 6. Iron, grooved -end butterfly valves. 7. Bronze lift check valves. 8. Bronze swing check valves. 9. Iron swing check valves. 10. Iron swing check valves with closure control. 11. Iron, grooved -end swing check valves. 12. Iron, center -guided check valves. 13. Iron, plate -type check valves. 14. Bronze gate valves. 15. Iron gate valves. 16. Bronze globe valves. 17. Iron globe valves. 18. Lubricated plug valves. 19. Chainwheels. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 22 plumbing piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. G. SWP: Steam working pressure. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single manufacturer. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 1 B. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME 831.9 for building services piping valves. C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable -water service. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect intemal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Refer to valve schedule articles for applications of valves. B. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. C. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. D. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator. For quarter -tum valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter -tum types. 3. Handlever. For quarter -tum valves NPS 6 and smaller except plug valves. 4. Wrench: For plug valves with square heads. Fumish Owner with 1 wrench for every 10 plug valves, for each size square plug -valve head. 5. Chainwheel: Device for attachment to valve handwheel, stem, or other actuator, of size and with chain for mounting height, as indicated in the 'Valve Installation" Article. E. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2 -inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non -thermal -conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. F. Valve -End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606. 3. Solder Joint With sockets according to ASME B16.18. 4. Threaded: With threads according to ASME 81.20.1. G. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP -45. 2.2 BRONZE ANGLE VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 2 b- Milwaukee Valve Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. B. Class 125, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. C. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. b. Kitz Corporation. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. D. Class 150, Bronze Angle Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. 2.3 BRASS BALL VALVES A. One -Piece, Reduced -Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kitz Corporation. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Forged brass. e. Ends: Threaded. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 3 f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Brass. h. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. i. Port: Reduced. B. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. j. Port: Full. C. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Brass Ball Valves with Stainless -Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Stainless steel. i. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. j. Port: Full. D. Two -Piece, Regular -Port, Brass Ball Valves with Brass Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Forged brass. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Brass. i. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. j. Port: Regular. 2.4 BRONZE BALL VALVES A. One -Piece, Reduced -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 4 b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Bronze. h. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. i. Port: Reduced. B. One -Piece, Reduced -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless -Steel Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. CWP Rating: 600 psig. c. Body Design: One piece. d. Body Material: Bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel, vented. i. Port: Reduced. C. Two -Piece, Full -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. L Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. j. Port: Full. D. Two -Piece, Regular -Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig. c. CWP Rating: 600 psig. d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome -plated brass. j. Port: Regular. 2.5 IRON BALL VALVES A. Class 125, Iron Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Valve, Inc. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 5 b. Kitz Corporation. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -72. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Split body. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seats: PTFE or TFE. g. Stem: Stainless steel. h. Ball: Stainless steel. i. Port: Full. 2.6 IRON, SINGLE -FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Aluminum -Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze. B. 200 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Aluminum -Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Aluminum bronze. C. 200 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile -Iron Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Nickel -plated or -coated ductile iron. D. 200 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Ductile -Iron Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 6 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Nickel -plated or -coated ductile iron. E. 200 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Stainless -Steel Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel. F. 200 CWP, Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves with NBR Seat and Stainless -Steel Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: NBR. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Stainless steel. 2.7 IRON, GROOVED -END BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 175 CWP, Iron, Grooved -End Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. b. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 175 psig. c. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. d. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. e. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. f. Seal: EPDM. B. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved -End Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. NIBCO INC. c. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. d. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -67, Type I. b. NPS 8 and Smaller CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. NPS 10 and Larger CWP Rating: 200 psig. d. Body Material: Coated, ductile iron. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 7 e. Stem: Two-piece stainless steel. f. Disc: Coated, ductile iron. g. Seal: EPDM. 2.8 BRONZE LIFT CHECK VALVES Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. B. Class 125, Lift Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Vertical flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 61 or ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: NBR, PTFE, or TFE. 2.9 BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. B. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. C. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Kitz Corporation. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 8 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 3. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze. D. Class 150, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 4. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. 2.10 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Nonmetallic -to -Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Composition. g. Seat Ring: Bronze. h. Disc Holder. Bronze. i. Disc: PTFE or TFE. j. Gasket: Asbestos free. C. Class 250, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 9 • • g. Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.11 IRON SWING CHECK VALVES WITH CLOSURE CONTROL A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Spring -Closure Control: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. h. Closure Control: Factory -installed, exterior lever and spring. B. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Lever- and Weight -Closure Control: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -71, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Gasket: Asbestos free. h. Closure Control: Factory -installed, exterior lever and weight. 2.12 IRON, GROOVED -END SWING CHECK VALVES A. 300 CWP, Iron, Grooved -End Swing Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Tyco Fire Products LP; Grinnell Mechanical Products. c. Victaulic Company. 2. Description: a. CWP Rating: 300 psig. b. Body Material: ASTM A 536, ductile iron. c. Seal: EPDM. d. Disc: Spring -operated, ductile iron or stainless steel. 2.13 IRON, CENTER -GUIDED CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: • 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Compact wafer. e. Seat: Bronze. B. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 10 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: Bronze. C. Class 150, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Style: Compact wafer. e. Seat: Bronze. D. Class 150, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat Bronze. E. Class 250, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Compact wafer, spring loaded. e. Seat Bronze. F. Class 250, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat Bronze. G. Class 300, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 11 d. Style: Compact wafer, spring loaded. e. Seat: Bronze. H. Class 300, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: Bronze. Class 125, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Compact wafer. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. J. Class 125, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil Intemational, Inc. b. Milwaukee Valve Company. c. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: EPDM or NBR. K. Class 150, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Style: Compact wafer. e. Seat EPDM or NBR. L. Class 150, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: EPDM or NBR. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 12 M. Class 250, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Compact wafer, spring loaded. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. N. Class 250, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: EPDM or NBR. O. Class 300, Iron, Compact -Wafer, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Style: Compact wafer, spring loaded. e. Seat EPDM or NBR. P. Class 300, Iron, Globe, Center -Guided Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crispin Valve. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -125. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. d. Style: Globe, spring loaded. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Seat: EPDM or NBR. 2.14 IRON, PLATE -TYPE CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Flomatic Corporation. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Seat: Bronze. B. Class 150, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 13 b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: Bronze. C. Class 250, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Seat: Bronze. D. Class 300, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: Bronze. E. Class 125, Iron, Single -Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Flo Fab Inc. b. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plate. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. F. Class 125, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO INC. b. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. G. Class 150, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. c. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 14 H. Class 250, Iron, Wafer, Single -Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plate. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. Class 250, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. c. Sure Flow Equipment Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. J. Class 300, Iron, Dual -Plate Check Valves with Resilient Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. APCO Willamette Valve and Primer Corporation. b. Val -Matic Valve & Manufacturing Corp. 2. Description: a. Standard: API 594. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Design: Wafer, spring-loaded plates. d. Body Material: ASTM A 395 or ASTM A 536, ductile iron. e. Seat: EPDM or NBR. 2.15 BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. B. Class 125, RS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 15 C. Class 150, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. D. Class 150, RS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. 2.16 IRON GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. B. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. C. Class 250, NRS, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -70, Type I. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 16 b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. D. Class 250, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -70, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge. g. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.17 BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. B. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded or solder joint. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. C. Class 150, Bronze Globe Valves with Nonmetallic Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -80, Type 2. b. CWP Rating: 300 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and union -ring bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: PTFE or TFE. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron, bronze, or aluminum. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 17 • • 2.18 IRON GLOBE VALVES A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. B. Class 250, Iron Globe Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Milwaukee Valve Company. b. NIBCO INC. c. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 500 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. 2.19 LUBRICATED PLUG VALVES A. Class 125, Regular -Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type II. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattern: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. B. Class 125, Regular -Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type II. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattem: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. C. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type IV. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattern: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. D. Class 125, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 18 b. Milliken Valve Company. c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type IV. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattern: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. E. Class 250, Regular -Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type II. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattern: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. F. Class 250, Regular -Gland, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Nordstrom Valves, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type II. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattem: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. G. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Threaded Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type IV. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattern: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. H. Class 250, Cylindrical, Lubricated Plug Valves with Flanged Ends: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Homestead Valve; a division of Olson Technologies, Inc. b. Milliken Valve Company. c. R & M Energy Systems; a unit of Robbins & Myers, Inc. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP -78, Type IV. b. CWP Rating: 400 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 48 or ASTM A 126, Grade 40 cast iron with lubrication -sealing system. d. Pattern: Venturi. e. Plug: Cast iron or bronze with sealant groove. 2.20 CHAINWHEELS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Babbitt Steam Specialty Co. 2. Roto Hammer Industries. 3. Trumbull Industries. B. Description: Valve actuation assembly with sprocket rim, brackets, and chain. 1. Brackets: Type, number, size, and fasteners required to mount actuator on valve. 2. Attachment: For connection to ball butterfly and plug valve stems. 3. Sprocket Rim with Chain Guides: Ductile or cast iron, of type and size required for valve. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 19 4. Chain: Hot -dip, galvanized steel, of size required to fit sprocket rim. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves. 3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install chainwheels in enclosed mechanical room on operators for ball butterfly gate globe and plug valves NPS 4 and larger and more than 96 inches above floor. Extend chains to 60 inches above finished floor. F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Center -Guided and Plate -Type Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs. 3.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, gate, or plug valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead -End Service: Single -flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service: Globe or angle or ball valves. 4. Pump -Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 and Smaller. Bronze swing check valves with bronze or nonmetallic disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Domestic Water. Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center -guided, metal or resilient -seat check valves. c. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger for Sanitary Waste and Storm Drainage: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or spring. B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted. C. Select valves, except wafer types, with the following end connections: 1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded ends except where solder -joint valve -end option is indicated in valve schedules below. GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 20 2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve -end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger. Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller. Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends except where threaded valve -end option is indicated in valve schedules below. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger. Flanged ends. 7. For Grooved -End Copper Tubing and Steel Piping: Valve ends may be grooved. 3.5 DOMESTIC, HOT- AND COLD -WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller. 1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder -joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. 3. Ball Valves: One piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. 5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, RS. 6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. 7. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150. 8. Iron, Single -Flange Butterfly Valves: 200 CWP, EPDM seat, aluminum -bronze disc. 9. Iron, Grooved -End Butterfly Valves: 300 CWP. 10. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, nonmetallic -to -metal seats. 11. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and spring. 12. Iron, Grooved -End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP. 13. Iron, Center -Guided Check Valves: Class 150, compact -wafer, resilient seat. 14. Iron, Plate -Type Check Valves: Class 150; dual plate; resilient seat. 15. Iron Gate Valves: Class 250. 16. Iron Globe Valves: Class 250. 3.6 SANITARY -WASTE AND STORM -DRAINAGE VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller. 1. Bronze and Brass Valves: May be provided with solder -joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Bronze Angle Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. 3. Ball Valves: Two piece, full port, brass or bronze with brass trim. 4. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. 5. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 150, RS. 6. Bronze Globe Valves: Class 150, nonmetallic disc. B. Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger. 1. Iron Valves, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: May be provided with threaded ends instead of flanged ends. 2. Iron Ball Valves: Class 150. 3. Iron Swing Check Valves: Class 250, nonmetallic -to -metal seats. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves with Closure Control: Class 125, lever and weight. 5. Iron, Grooved -End Swing Check Valves: 300 CWP. 6. Iron Gate Valves: Class 250, OS&Y. 7. Iron Globe Valves: Class 250. 8. Lubricated Plug Valves: Class 250, regular gland, flanged. END OF SECTION 220523 GENERAL -DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 220523 - 21 McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 220529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following hangers and supports for plumbing system piping and equipment: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Fiberglass pipe hangers. 4. Metal framing systems. 5. Fiberglass strut systems. 6. Thermal -hanger shield inserts. 7. Fastener systems. 8. Pipe stands. 9. Pipe positioning systems. 10. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural -steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 2. Division 21 Section 'Water -Based Fire -Suppression Systems" for pipe hangers for fire -suppression piping. 3. Division 22 Section "Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping" for pipe guides and anchors. 4. Division 22 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for vibration isolation devices 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for the Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. B. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP -90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. C. Design seismic -restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Fiberglass pipe hangers. 3. Thermal -hanger shield inserts. 4. Powder -actuated fastener systems. 5. Pipe positioning systems. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 1 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Fiberglass strut systems. Include Product Data for components. 4. Pipe stands. Include Product Data for components. 5. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code—Steel." 2. AWS 01.2, "Structural Welding Code—Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code—Reinforcing Steel." 4. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP -58, Types 1 through 58, factory -fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. AAA Technology & Specialties Co., Inc. 2. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 3. Grinnell Corp. 4. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. C. Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. E. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP -69, Type 59, shop or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made from structural - steel shapes with MSS SP -58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U -bolts. 2.4 FIBERGLASS PIPE HANGERS A. Clevis-Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Similar to MSS Type 1, steel pipe hanger except hanger is made of fiberglass and continuous -thread rod and nuts are made of polyurethane or stainless steel. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. B. Strap -Type, Fiberglass Pipe Hangers: Made of fiberglass loop with stainless-steel continuous -thread rod, nuts, and support hook. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Plasti-Fab, Inc. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 2 • • 2.5 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Power -Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd. 3. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. C. Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish unless bare metal surfaces are indicated. D. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.6 FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS A. Description: Shop- or field -fabricated pipe -support assembly, similar to MFMA-3, made of fiberglass channels and other components. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B -Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2.7 THERMAL -HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Description: 100-psig minimum, compressive -strength insulation insert encased in sheet metal shield. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Pipe Shields, Inc. C. Insulation -Insert Material for Cold Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with vapor barrier. D. Insulation -Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate or ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass. E. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. F. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. G. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.8 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder -Actuated Fasteners: Threaded -steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull- out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. B. Mechanical -Expansion Anchors: Insert -wedge -type zinc -coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. 2.9 PIPE STAND FABRICATION A. Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field -fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosion -resistant components to support roof -mounted piping. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 3 B. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral -rod -roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. b. MIRO Industries. C. Low -Type, Single -Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic base unit with plastic roller, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. MIRO Industries. D. High -Type, Single -Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe support, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co. b. MIRO Industries. c. Portable Pipe Hangers. 2. Base: Plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium -plated -steel or stainless-steel, continuous -thread rods. 4. Horizontal Member. Cadmium -plated -steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainless-steel, roller - type pipe support. E. High -Type, Multiple -Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Portable Pipe Hangers. 2. Bases: One or more plastic. 3. Vertical Members: Two or more protective -coated -steel channels. 4. Horizontal Member. Protective -coated -steel channel. 5. Pipe Supports: Galvanized -steel, clevis-type pipe hangers. F. Curb -Mounting -Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field -fabricated pipe support made from structural -steel shape, continuous -thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb. 2.10 PIPE POSITIONING SYSTEMS A. Description: IAPMO PS 42, system of metal brackets, dips, and straps for positioning piping in pipe spaces for plumbing fixtures for commercial applications. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. CBS Mfg. Corp. 2. HOLDRITE Corp.; Hubbard Enterprises. 3. Samco Stamping, Inc. 2.11 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field -fabricated equipment support made from structural -steel shapes. 2.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout ASTM C 1107, factory -mixed and packaged, dry, hydraulic -cement, non -shrink and non-metallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non -staining, non -corrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000 -psi, 28 -day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 4 B. Comply with MSS SP -69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field -applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal -Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non -insulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Yoke -Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel, Double -Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required. 5. Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow off -center closure for hanger installation before pipe erection. 6. Adjustable, Swivel Split or Solid -Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8. 7. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 8. Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8. 9. Adjustable, Swivel -Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2. 10. Split Pipe -Ring with or without Tumbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8. 11. Extension Hinged or 2 -Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of non -insulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3. 12. U -Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 13. Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or contraction. 14. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 15. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U -bolt to retain pipe. 16. Adjustable, Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion -type support for pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 17. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 18. Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 19. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. 20. Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical adjustment is not necessary. 21. Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition to expansion and contraction. G. Vertical -Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20. 2. Carbon- or Alloy -Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220529 - 5 • • • B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment_ C. Iron grooved -end valves may be used with grooved -end piping. END OF SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 16 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building: 1. Pipe, tube, and fittings. 2. Special pipe fittings. 3. Encasement for underground metal piping. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Sanitary Sewerage Pumps." 2. Division 22 Section "Chemical Waste -Systems for Laboratory and Healthcare Facilities" for chemical - waste and vent piping systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic. B. EPDM: Ethylene -propylene -diene terpolymer rubber. C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic. D. NBR: Acrylonitrile -butadiene rubber. E. PE: Polyethylene plastic. • F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10 -foot head of water. 2. Sanitary Sewer, Force -Main Piping: 150 psig. B. Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall be capable of withstanding the effects of seismic events determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures." 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Design Calculations: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer for selecting seismic restraints. 2. Sovent Drainage System: Include plans, elevations, sections, and details. C. Field quality -control inspection and test reports. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF -drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF -tubular' for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF -sewer for plastic sewer piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 PIPING MATERIALS A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials. 2.3 HUB -AND -SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra -Heavy class(es). B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. 2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301. B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings. C. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion -resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop. 1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) Mission Rubber Co. 2) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 2. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Stainless -Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) ANACO. 2) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 3. Heavy -Duty, Shielded, Cast -Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48, two-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless- steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve. a. Available Manufacturers: 1) MG Piping Products Co. D. Rigid, Unshielded Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type, reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 2 • • 2.5 DUCTILE -IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Mechanical -Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with mechanical -joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Mechanical -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray -iron standard pattem or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattem. 2. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile or gray -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. B. Push -on -Joint, Ductile -Iron Pipe: AWWA C151, with push -on -joint bell and plain spigot end, unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. 1. Push -on -Joint, Ductile -Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray -iron standard pattem or AWWA C153, ductile -iron compact pattem. 2. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber. C. Grooved -Joint Systems: 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Victaulic Company. 2. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron Fittings: ASTM A 47, malleable -iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile -iron castings with dimensions matching pipe. 3. Grooved -End, Ductile -Iron -Piping Couplings: AWWA C606, for ductile -iron -pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for water, and bolts and nuts. D. Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125, cast iron. 2.6 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Copper DWV Tube: ASTM B 306, drainage tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Drainage Fittings: ASME B16.23, cast copper or ASME B16.29, wrought copper, solder -joint fittings. B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Types L and M, water tube, drawn temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought -copper, solder joint fittings. Fumish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2. Copper Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, cast copper with solder -joint end. 3. Copper Unions: MSS SP -123, copper -alloy, hexagonal -stock body with ball-and-socket, metal -to - metal seating surfaces, and solder -joint or threaded ends. C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, annealed temper. 1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast -copper -alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought -copper, solder -joint fittings. Fumish wrought -copper fittings if indicated. 2.7 ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. B. Cellular -Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. C. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. D. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer. 1. Use ABS solvent cement that has a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.8 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Solid -Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, socket type, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. B. Cellular -Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 3 • 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. C. Cellular -Core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Series PS 100. 1. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Series PS 100 sewer and drain pipe. D. Solvent Cement and Adhesive Primer. 1. Use PVC solvent cement that has a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use adhesive primer that has a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.9 SPECIAL PIPE FITTINGS A. Flexible, Non -pressure Pipe Couplings: Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve -type, reducing or transition pattern. Include shear ring, ends of same sizes as piping to be joined, and corrosion -resistant - metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Dallas Specialty & Mfg. Co. b. Femco, Inc. c. Mission Rubber Co. d. NDS, Inc. 2. Sleeve Materials: a. For Cast -Iron Soil Pipes: ASTM C 564, rubber. b. For Plastic Pipes: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal or ASTM D 5926, PVC. c. For Dissimilar Pipes: ASTM D 5926, PVC or other material compatible with pipe materials being joined. B. Shielded Non -pressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length, corrosion -resistant outer shield and corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co. b. Mission Rubber Co. C. Rigid, Unshielded, Non -pressure Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1461, sleeve -type reducing- or transition -type mechanical coupling molded from ASTM C 1440, TPE material with corrosion -resistant -metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. ANACO. D. Pressure Pipe Couplings: AWWA C219 metal, sleeve -type same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to, and ends compatible with, pipes to be joined. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. b. JCM Industries, Inc. c. Romac Industries, Inc. d. Smith -Blair, Inc. 2. Center -Sleeve Material: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Gasket Material: Natural or synthetic rubber. 4. Metal Component Finish: Corrosion -resistant coating or material. E. Flexible Ball Joints: Ductile -iron fitting with combination of flanged and mechanical joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include gasketed ball joint section and ductile -iron gland, rubber gasket, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. F. Expansion Joints: Two or three-piece, ductile -iron assembly consisting of telescoping sleeve(s) with gaskets and restrained -type, ductile -iron, bell -and -spigot end sections complying with A1NWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Indude AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. EBAA Iron Sales, Inc. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 4 G. Wall -Penetration Fittings: Compound, ductile -iron coupling fitting with sleeve and flexing sections for up to 20 -degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained -joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile -iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. SIGMA Corp. 2.10 ENCASEMENT FOR UNDERGROUND METAL PIPING A. Description: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105, high-density, cross -laminated PE film of 0.004 -inch or LLDPE film of 0.008 -inch minimum thickness. B. Form: Sheet or tube. C. Color Black or natural. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. 3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated. B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel; and rigid, unshielded couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. 4. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 6. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, nonpressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. C. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard, and heavy-duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. D. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard shielded, stainless-steel; and rigid, unshielded couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Stainless-steel pipe and fittings gaskets, and gasketed joints. 5. Copper DWV tube, copper drainage fittings, and soldered joints. a. Option for Vent Piping, NPS 2-1/2 and NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type M; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 6. Solid -wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 7. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 8. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. E. Aboveground, vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints. 4. Solid -wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 5 • • 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. F. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and rigid, unshielded couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Stainless-steel pipe and fittings, gaskets, and gasketed joints. 4. Solid wall ABS pipe, ABS socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Solid wall PVC pipe, PVC socket fittings, and solvent -cemented joints. 6. Cellular -core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. 7. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Sheilded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. G. Underground, soil and waste piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Service class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel; and heavy-duty shielded, cast-iron couplings; and hubless-coupling joints. 3. Solid -wall, Schedule 40, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. 4. Cellular -core, Sewer and Drain Series, PVC pipe; PVC socket fittings; and solvent -cemented joints. 5. Dissimilar Pipe -Material Couplings: Flexible, Shielded, non -pressure pipe couplings for joining dissimilar pipe materials with small difference in OD. H. Aboveground sanitary -sewage force mains NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2 shall be any of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. Aboveground sanitary -sewage force mains NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6 shall be any of the following: 1. Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. 3. Grooved -end steel pipe, grooved -joint system fittings and couplings, and grooved joints. J. Underground sanitary -sewage force mains NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following: 1. Soft copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints. 2. Steel pipe, pressure fittings, and threaded joints. a. Include grooved -joint system fittings and couplings and grooved joints where indicated. 3. Mechanical -joint, ductile -iron pipe; mechanical -joint, ductile -iron fittings; glands, gaskets, and bolts; and mechanical joints. a. Include grooved joint system fittings and couplings and grooved joints where indicated. 4. Push -on -joint, ductile -iron pipe; push -on -joint ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. a. Include grooved -joint system fittings and couplings and grooved joints where indicated. 5. Pressure pipe couplings, if dissimilar pipe materials or piping with small difference in OD must be joined. K. Underground sanitary -sewage force mains NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following: 1. Mechanical -joint, ductile -iron pipe; mechanical -joint, ductile -iron fittings; glands, gaskets, and bolts; and mechanical -joint joints. 2. Push -on -joint, ductile -iron pipe; push -on -joint, ductile -iron fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 3. Pressure pipe couplings, if dissimilar pipe materials or piping with small difference in OD must be joined. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 22 Section "Facility Sanitary Sewers." B. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic -restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section 'Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." D. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers. E. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force -main piping. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 6 • • F. Install underground, steel, force -main piping.[ Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.] G. Install underground, ductile -iron, force -main piping according to AWWA C600. Install buried piping inside the building between wall and floor penetrations and connection to sanitary sewer piping outside the building with restrained joints. Anchor pipe to wall or floor. Install thrust -block supports at vertical and horizontal offsets. 1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or A1NWA C105. H. Install underground, copper, force -main tubing according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." 1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. I. Install underground, ductile -iron, special pipe fittings according to AWWA C600. 1. Install encasement on piping according to ASTM A 674 or AVWVA C105. J. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." K. Install wall -penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight. L. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. M. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long -sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short -sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long -tum, double Y -branch and 1/8 -bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. N. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. Q. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller, 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger. 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack. P. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows: 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions. 3. Reduced -Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction. Q. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs -on -grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing. R. Install ABS soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2661. S. Install PVC soil and waste drainage and vent piping according to ASTM D 2665. T. Install underground ABS and PVC soil and waste drainage piping according to ASTM D 2321. U. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 7 • • 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing." B. Join hub -and -spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints. C. Join hub -and -spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints. D. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints. E. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead -free -alloy solder, and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated. F. Grooved Joints: Assemble joint with keyed coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. G. PVC Nonpressure Piping Joints: Join piping according to ASTM D 2665. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General valve installation requirements are specified in Division 22 Section "General -Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valve on each sewage pump discharge. 1. Install gate or full -port ball valve for piping NPS 2 and smaller. 2. Install gate valve for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger. C. Check Valves: Install swing check valve, between pump and shutoff valve, on each sewage pump discharge. D. Backwater Valves: Install backwater valves in piping subject to sewage backflow. 1. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal backwater valves. 2. Floor Drains: Drain outlet backwater valves, unless drain has integral backwater valve. 3. Install backwater valves in accessible locations. 4. Backwater valve are specified in Division 22 Section "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties." 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Seismic -restraint devices are specified in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following: 1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following: a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls. 3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer. MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. 4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. C. Install supports according to Division 22 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double -rod hangers, with 3/8 -inch minimum rods. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 8 F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet. H. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 3: 12 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4 -inch rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8 -inch rod. I. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet. J. Install hangers for stainless-steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 2: 84 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 96 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. K. Install supports for vertical stainless-steel piping every 10 feet. L. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 3. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 4. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2 -inch rod. 5. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8 -inch rod. 6. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4 -inch rod. M. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. N. Install hangers for ABS and PVC piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 48 inches with 3/8 -inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 48 inches with 1/2 -inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and 5: 48 inches with 5/8 -inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 48 inches with 3/4 -inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 48 inches with 7/8 -inch rod. O. Install supports for vertical ABS and PVC piping every 48 inches. P. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP -69 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.7 CONNECTIONS A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 9 2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. 4. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve, if indicated, and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 and larger. D. Connect force -main piping to the following: 1. Sanitary Sewer. To exterior force main or sanitary manhole. 2. Sewage Pumps: To sewage pump discharge. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing -in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing -in after roughing -in and before setting fixtures. 2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements. B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 3. Roughing -in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing -in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 -foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for Teaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent -stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1 - inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. 5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. E. Test force -main piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced force -main piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. 2. Cap and subject piping to static -water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 3. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. 4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 10 C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Exposed ABS and PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of water-based latex paint. END OF SECTION 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 11 • • McDonald's USA, LLC Project Manual SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties: 1. Backwater valves. 2. Cleanouts. 3. Floor drains. 4. Trench drains. 5. Air -admittance valves. 6. Roof flashing assemblies. 7. Through -penetration firestop assemblies. 8. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 9. Flashing materials. 10. Grease interceptors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 Section "Storm Drainage Piping Specialties" for trench drains for storm water, channel drainage systems for storm water, roof drains, and catch basins. 2. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Fixtures" for hair interceptors. 3. Division 22 Section "Healthcare Plumbing Fixtures" for plaster sink interceptors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ABS: Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene plastic. B. FOG: Fats, oils, and greases. C. FRP: Fiberglass -reinforced plastic. D. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic. E. PE: Polyethylene plastic. F. PP: Polypropylene plastic. G. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following: 1. Grease interceptors. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for frost -resistant vent terminals. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: Submit certification that grease interceptors, accessories, and components will withstand seismic forces defined in Division 22 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Include the following: 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1 a. The term 'withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements. D. Field quality -control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For drainage piping specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor -bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03. B. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 BACKWATER VALVES A. Horizontal, Cast -Iron Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Watts Drainage Products Inc. c. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.14.1. 3. Size: Same as connected piping. 4. Body: Cast iron. 5. Cover. Cast iron with bolted or threaded access check valve. 6. End Connections: Hub and spigot or hubless. 7. Type Check Valve: Removable, bronze, swing check, factory assembled or field modified to hang open for airflow unless subject to backflow condition. 8. Extension: ASTM A 74, Service class; full-size, cast-iron, soil -pipe extension to field -installed cleanout at floor, replaces backwater valve cover. B. Drain -Outlet Backwater Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfr. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Watts Drainage Products Inc. c. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet 3. Body: Cast iron or bronze made for vertical installation in bottom outlet of floor drain. 4. Check Valve: Removable ball float. 5. Inlet: Threaded. 6. Outlet: Threaded or spigot. C. Horizontal, Plastic Backwater Valves: SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 2 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Size: Same as connected piping. 3. Body: ABS. 4. Cover. Same material as body with threaded access to check valve. 5. Check Valve: Removable swing check. 6. End Connections: Socket type. 2.2 CLEANOUTS A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Watts Drainage Products Inc. c. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk brass plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Closure: Stainless-steel plug with seal. B. Metal Floor Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for threaded, adjustable housing cleanout. 3. Size: Same as connected branch. 4. Type: Threaded, adjustable housing. 5. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet Connection: Threaded. 8. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket. 9. Adjustable Housing Material: Plastic with threads. 10. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel -bronze, copper alloy. 11. Frame and Cover Shape: Square. 12. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 13. Riser. ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron drainage pipe fitting and riser to deanout. C. Cast -Iron Wall Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Watts Drainage Products Inc. c. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M. Include wall access. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping. 4. Body: Hubless, cast-iron soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk, drilled -and -threaded plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size. 7. Wall Access: Round, flat, chrome -plated brass or stainless-steel cover plate with screw. D. Plastic Floor Cleanouts: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Size: Same as connected branch. 3. Body: PVC. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 3 4. Closure Plug: PVC. 5. Riser: Drainage pipe fitting and riser to deanout of same material as drainage piping. 2.3 FLOOR DRAINS A. Cast -Iron Floor Drains: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. c. Watts Drainage Products Inc. d. Zum Plumbing Products Group. 2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattem: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Seepage Flange: Required. 6. Clamping Device: Required. 7. Outlet: Bottom. 8. Backwater Valve: Not required. 9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required. 10. Sediment Bucket: Not required. 11. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze. 12. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 13. Top Shape: Square. 14. Dimensions of Top or Strainer. 6 inch Square. 15. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty. 16. Funnel: See Plans. 17. Inlet Fitting: Not required. 18. Trap Material: Not required. 19. Trap Pattem: Not required. 20. Trap Features: Not required. B. Plastic Floor Drains: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Material: ABS or PVC. 4. Seepage Flange: Required. 5. Clamping Device: Required. 6. Outlet: Side. 7. Sediment Bucket: Not required. 8. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze. 9. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze. 10. Top Shape: Square. 11. Dimensions of Top or Strainer. 6 inch Square. 12. Trap Material: Not required. 13. Trap Pattem: Not required. 2.4 TRENCH DRAINS A. Trench Drains: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. b. Watts Drainage Products Inc. c. Zum Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains. 3. Material: Ductile or gray iron. 4. Flange: Seepage. 5. Clamping Device: Not required. 6. Outlet: Bottom. 7. Grate Material: Stainless steel. 8. Grate Finish: Not required. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 4 9. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: See Drawings. 10. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy -Duty. 11. Trap Material: Not required. 12. Trap Pattern: Not required. 2.5 AIR -ADMITTANCE VALVES A. Stack Air -Admittance Valves: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Studor, Inc. 3. Standard: ASSE 1050 for vent stacks. 4. Housing: Plastic. 5. Operation: Mechanical sealing diaphragm. 6. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. B. Wall Box: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Studor, Inc. 3. Description: White plastic housing with white plastic grille, made for recessed installation. Include bottom pipe connection and space to contain one air -admittance valve. 4. Size: About 9 inches wide by 8 inches high by 4 inches deep. 2.6 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES A. Roof Flashing Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Acom Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 6.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized -steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting. 1. Open -Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low -Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal -proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field -installed, vandal -proof vent cap. 2.7 THROUGH -PENETRATION FIRESTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Through -Penetration Firestop Assemblies: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ProSet Systems Inc. 2. Standard: UL 1479 assembly of sleeve and stack fitting with firestopping plug. 3. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent stack. 4. Sleeve: Molded PVC plastic, of length to match slab thickness and with integral nailing flange on one end for installation in cast -in-place concrete slabs. 5. Stack Fitting: ASTM A 48, gray -iron, hubless-pattem, wye branch with neoprene 0 -ring at base and gray -iron plug in thermal -release hamess. Include PVC protective cap for plug. 6. Special Coating: Corrosion resistant on interior of fittings. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Open Drains: 1. Description: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub -and -spigot, cast-iron, soil - pipe fittings. Include P -trap, hub -and -spigot riser section; and where required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. B. Deep -Seal Traps: SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 5 1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap -seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as connected waste piping. a. NPS 2: 4 -inch- minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-12 and Larger. 5 -inch- minimum water seal. C. Floor -Drain, Trap -Seal Primer Fittings: 1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap -seal primer valve connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet. D. Air -Gap Fittings: 1. Standard: ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping. 2. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 3. Inlet: Opening in top of body. 4. Outlet: Larger than inlet. 5. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for associated indirect waste piping. E. Sleeve Flashing Device: 1. Description: Manufactured, cast-iron fitting, with clamping device, that forms sleeve for pipe floor penetrations of floor membrane. Include galvanized -steel pipe extension in top of fitting that will extend 1 inch above finished floor and galvanized -steel pipe extension in bottom of fitting that will extend through floor slab. 2. Size: As required for dose fit to riser or stack piping. F. Stack Flashing Fittings: 1. Description: Counterflashing-type, cast-iron fitting, with bottom recess for terminating roof membrane, and with threaded or hub top for extending vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. G. Vent Caps: 1. Description: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal -proof design. Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. 2. Size: Same as connected stack vent or vent stack. H. Frost -Resistant Vent Terminals: 1. Description: Manufactured or shop -fabricated assembly constructed of copper, lead -coated copper, or galvanized steel. 2. Design: To provide 1 -inch enclosed air space between outside of pipe and inside of flashing collar extension, with counterflashing. Expansion Joints: 1. Standard: ASME A112.21.2M. 2. Body: Cast iron with bronze sleeve, packing, and gland. 3. End Connections: Matching connected piping. 4. Size: Same as connected soil, waste, or vent piping. 2.9 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Lead Sheet: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, copper bearing, with the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Use: 4.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0625 -inch thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 3.0-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0469 -inch thickness. 3. Buming: 6-Ib/sq. ft., 0.0938 -inch thickness. B. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated: 1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. C. Zinc -Coated Steel Sheet ASTM A 653, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04 -inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot -dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 6 D. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40 -mil minimum thickness. E. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened. F. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, damps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed. G. Solder. ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy. H. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent -type, bituminous mastic. 2.10 GREASE INTERCEPTORS A. Grease Interceptors: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Green Turtle Americas. b. Any precast manufacturer acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Standard: ASME A112.14.3 and PDI -G101, for intercepting and retaining fats, oils, and greases from food -preparation wastewater. 3. Plumbing and Drainage Institute Seal: Required. 4. Body Material: Plastic or Concrete. 5. Interior Lining: Epoxy couting for Concrete. 6. Exterior Coating: Not required. 7. Inlet and Outlet Size: 4°. 8. End Connections: Hub. 9. Cleanout: Integral or field installed on outlet. 10. Flow -Control Fitting: Not required. 11. Operation: Manual cleaning. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Division 22 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements. B. Install backwater valves in building drain piping. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover, and of adequate size to remove valve cover for servicing. C. Install deanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated. 2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack. D. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor. E. For deanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall. F. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii: a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4 -inch total depression. b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger. Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater than 1 -inch total depression. SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 7 3. Install floor -drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated. 4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated. G. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated. H. Install stack air -admittance valves at top of stack vent and vent stack piping. I. Install air -admittance -valve wall boxes recessed in wall. J. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof. K. Assemble open drain fittings and install with top of hub 2 inches above floor. L. Install deep -seal traps on floor drains and other waste outlets, if indicated. M. Install floor -drain, trap -seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap -seal primer connection. 1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap -seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet. N. Install air -gap fittings on draining -type backflow preventers and on indirect -waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system. O. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane. P. Install vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Q. Install frost -resistant vent terminals on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1 -inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. R. Install expansion joints on vertical stacks and conductors. Position expansion joints for easy access and maintenance. S. Install frost -proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1 -inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate. T. Install grease interceptors, including trapping, venting, and flow -control fitting, according to authorities having jurisdiction and with clear space for servicing. 1. Install cleanout immediately downstream from interceptors not having integral deanout on outlet. U. Install traps on plumbing specialty drain outlets. Omit traps on indirect wastes unless trap is indicated. V. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep -pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. 3.2 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance. C. Grease Interceptors: Connect inlet and outlet to unit, and connect flow -control fitting and vent to unit inlet piping. Install valve on outlet of automatic drawoff-type unit. D. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." E. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low -Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 8